0 rl m
m
0
0
rl
The 2003 Chevrolet TahoeEuburban Owner Manual
~~
Seats and Restraint Systems ...........................
1-1
Front
Seats
...............................................
1-3
...............................................
1-8
Rear
Seats
1-22
Safety Belts .............................................
....................................... 1-44
Child Restraints
......................................
1-68
Air
Bag
Systems
............................
1-80
Restraint
System
Check
Features and Controls .....................................
2-1
Keys ........................................................ 2-3
....................................... 2-8
Doors
and
Locks
2-15
Windows .................................................
2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................
........... 2-21
Startingand Operating Your Vehicle
Mirrors .................................................... 2-42
......................................
2-51
Onstar@System
2-53
HomeLink@Transmitter .............................
.........................................
2-57
Storage
Areas
Sunroof
..................................................
2-60
2-61
Vehicle Personalization .............................
Instrument Panel .............................................
3-1
3-4
Instrument Panel Overview ..........................
......................................
3-20
Climate Controls
WarningLights,Gagesand
Indicators ......... 3-35
Driver Information Center(DIC)
.................. 3-52
.......................................
3-70
Audio
System(s)
Driving Your Vehicle .......................................
4-1
..... 4-2
Your Driving, the Road,andYour
Vehicle
...................................................
4-53
Towing
5-1
Service and Appearance Care ..........................
5-3
Service .....................................................
5-5
Fuel .........................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12
5-50
All-Wheel Drive ........................................
............................................... 5-51
Rear Axle
5-52
Four-wheel Drive .....................................
...............................................
5-53
Front Axle
Bulb Replacement
....................................
5-54
......... 5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......................................................
5-61
Tires
.....................................
5-88
Appearance
Care
5-96
Vehicle Identification .................................
Electrical System ......................................
5-97
Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-106
.... 5-109
NormalMaintenanceReplacement
Parts
Maintenance Schedule .....................................
6-1
................................
6-2
Maintenance
Schedule
Customer Assistance Information ....................
7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ...........................
lnex ..................................................................
1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
TAHOE and the name SUBURBAN are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name ”General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2316 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/24/02
All Rights Reserved
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
I
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other
people.
1
I
I
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
...
II’
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio Systems in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT
OCCUPANT
DO
NOT
TWIST
SAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
fi
-
ENGINE
COOLANT cc
TEMP
*
W
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD+
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
PULL BELT
L
LAMPS
FLASHER
Pf
A
DO NOT INSTALLA
FORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
COMPLETELY
rHEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
WINDOW
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
\v/
sz
SPARK OR
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
LIGHTING
TURN
SIGNALS
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
4CID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVO ID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
48:@
l h
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
#0
FOG
l.fd
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
FUEL
COOLANT
GI
ENGINE OIL
PRESSUREw
LAMPS
F E
ACCESS
ANTI-LOCK
4
(@)
BRAKES
OWNER'S
MANUAL
SERVICE
MANUAL
a
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Suburban
Tahoe
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front
Seats
.............
............
.......1-3
Manual
Seats ...........
............................. -1-3
Power Seats ................................................. -1-4
Power Lumbar ............................................... 1-4
Heated Seats .................................................
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................
1-5
Head Restraints ............................................. 1-7
Rear Seats ...................................................... -1-8
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-8
1-8
60/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................
50/50 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-10
Bench Seat ..................................................
1-14
Bucket Seats ............................................... 1-19
Safety Belts ................................................... 1-22
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-22
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-27
Driver Position ..............................................
1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-35
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-36
Center Passenger Position ............................. 1-36
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1-38
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children
and Small Adults .......................................
1-41
Safety Belt Extender ............................. 1-43
Child Restraints ............................................. 1-44
Older Children ..............................................
1-44
Infants and Young Children ............................ 1-46
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-49
Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-52
1-53
Top Strap ....................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-54
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-56
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ......................................... 1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ........................................... -1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ............................................ 1-61
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position ............................................ 1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................ 1-64
Air Bag Systems ............................................
1-68
Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-70
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-72
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-74
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-74
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-74
Passenger Sensing System ............................ 1.76
Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle ................................ 1.79
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................
1.79
1-2
Restraint System Check .................................. 1.80
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1.80
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ............................................
......1-81
Front Seats
Manual Seats
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicleis not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench
seat, you can adjust it with this lever located at the front
of the seat.
Lift the lever to unlock the seat. Using your body, slide
the seat to where you want it and release the lever.
Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the rear edge of the horizontal
control.
Moving the whole horizontal control up or down
raises or lowers the entire seat cushion.
If your vehicle has power reclining seats, you can use
the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward
by moving the control toward the rear or the front of the
vehicle. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has a power seat, you can adjust it with
these controls located on the outboard sides of the
seats.
Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the forward edge of the
horizontal control.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the four-way
control is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
=g
. ..
@
:
.,.Xr
.
e
4
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole horizontal control forward or rearward.
To increase or decrease support, press and hold the
front or rear of the control. Let go of the control when the
lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.
1-4
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support. To increase or
decrease support, press and hold the top or bottom of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
The engine must be running for them to operate.
The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition
is turned off. If you still want to use the heated front
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the heated seat button again.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the button used to
control the driver’s
heated seat is located on
the driver’s door panel.
The button used to control
the passenger’s heated
seat is located on the
passenger’s door panel.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button.
Press the button to cycle through
the temperature
settings of high, medium, and low. The indicator light
will glow to indicate the level of heat selected.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will glow to designate thatonly the seatback
is being heated.
To adjust the front seatback, lift the manual lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Release the
lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Lift
the lever again without pushing on the seatback and the
seatback will go to an upright position.
1-5
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on
how to operate the reclining seatback feature,
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t doits job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1 -6
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint.
On some models the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
I
The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be
adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head
restraints, except they do not tilt forward and rearward.
1-7
Rear Seats
To operate the easy entry seat turn the release lever,
located on the back of the seat upward.
Rear Seat Operation
Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by
pulling the top of the seat forward. When you do the seat
bottom will release. Pull the seat forward until it stops.
Entering or Exiting the Third
Row Seats
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position
when finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
60/40Split Bench Seat
I. _.le seatb--k isn’t lock,,, it caw., ...- ~e
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
SuburbanNukon XL: The passenger’s side of the
second row 60/40 or rear bucket seats has an
easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out
of the third seat, if your vehicle has one.
1-8
TahoeNukon: The rear seat may have a 60/40 split
seat which may be folded down to give you more cargo
space.
SuburbanNukon XL: The second row rear seat of
SuburbanNukon XL models may have a60/40 split seat.
Either side of the rear seat my be folded down to
provide more cargo space.
Folding the Seatbacks
To fold, pull up on the
strap loop at the rear of
the seat cushion.
Then, pull the seat cushion
up and fold it forward.
If the seatbacn m ’ t locked, it could mlude
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat
and that the head restraints are completely lowered.
On TahoeNukon models the rear seatbacks may
be equipped with rearward folding head restraints. When
the seatback is being folded down, the head restraint
will automatically fold rearward to allow a flat load floor
for cargo or entry to the third row seat (if equipped).
After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the
seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is
flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it
interferes with the cushion, try moving the seat forward
and/or bring the front seatback more upright. On the
passenger side of the SuburbanNukon XL models, the
lever at the base of the seat must be turned rearward
to release the seatback.
1-9
3. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
4. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat
cushion to make sure the seat is securely in
place.
Make sure that the buckles on the driver's side seatback
are accessible to the outboard and center occupant
and are not under the seat cushions.
On TahoeNukon models make sure the head restraints
are returned to the upright position.
50/50Split Bench Seat
To create a load floor release the panels from the
seatback by pushing forward on the latch. Then fold the
panels back to cover the rear seat footwell area.
To return the seat to the passenger position on a
SuburbanNukon XL do the following:
1 . Lift the floor load panels and latch them into the
seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up and push rearward all the way.
1-10
If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench, the seatback(s)
can be folded and the entire seat(s) tilted or removed
from the vehicles.
Folding the Seatbacks
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
~
If the seatback isn’t locked, it c-Ad move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sureit is
locked.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could
cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To fold the seatbacks do the following:
Pull up on the release lever, labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback, and push the seatback
forward.
I
If the support rod isn’t properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loosein a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damageto your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seatis folded forward.
To return the seat to the passenger position, pull up
on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on
the seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked
into position.
I
Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat
load floor. To do this, do the following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
3. With the seat folded, unlatch the seat from the floor
by pulling up on the lever located under the
carrying handle at the rear of the seat labeled 2.
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
1-12
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
To remove the 50/50 split bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seai
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull up
on the release
lever labeled 2, located
at the rear of the
seat, and lift the rear of
the seat up off the
floor.
Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
If the seatback L . ’ t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sure it is
locked.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor, while
pulling the seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock theseat into place properly when
installing it.
1-13
Bench Seat
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash.The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To reinstall the 50/50 split bench, do the following:
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-14
If your vehicle has a full bench seat, the seatback can
be folded and the seat can be tilted or removed from the
vehicle.
FolAingthe Seatback
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting
there. Always
press rearward on the seatback tobe sure it is
locked.
To fold the seatback on the bench seat, do the following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever, labeled 1,
located on the rear of
the seatback and
push the seatback
forward.
2. To return the seat to an upright position, pull up on
the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the
seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked
into place.
Tilting the Bench Seat
If the seat.,ck
isn’t lockeb, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the personsitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is
locked.
If the support rod isn’t properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loosein a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damageto your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seatis folded forward.
Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat
load floor. To do this, do the following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
1-15
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
3. With the seat folded,
unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling
up on the lever located
under the carrying
handle at the rear of
the seat labeled 2.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
1-16
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
Removing the Bench Seat
To remove the full bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2 Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull up
on the release
lever labeled 2, located
at the rear of the
seat, and l i f t the rear of
the seat up off the
floor.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor while
pulling the seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-17
Replacing the Bench Seat
A safe-, _Itthat is improperly luted, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising therear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety beltsare properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
.-
If the seatback isn’t locket t could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sureit is
locked.
To reinstall the full bench seat, do the following:
A CAUTION:
.,. .
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
.
Aa
,t
that isn’t locked int- >lace properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
I
1-18
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
Bucket Seats
Folding the Seatbacks
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined and the seats can be folded to give you
more cargo room.
Reclining the Seatbacks
On the SuburbanNukon XL models with bucket seats,
the seatbacks can be reclined. To adjust the seatback
do the following:
1. Pull forward the lever located at the base of
the seat.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. If you pull the lever without pushing on the
seatback, the seatback will go to an upright
position.
__
-he seatbac-'t
locked, -:could n.- ve
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
The seatbacks on the bucket seats may be folded
forward to give you more cargo space.
On SuburbanNukon XL models with rear bucket seats,
the head restraints need to be removed in order to
fold the rear seats. To do this follow these directions:
1. Lift the head restraints up until they stop.
2. Press in the button on the side of the head restraint
guide cap and lift up on the head restraint.
3. Do the same for the other cap.
1-19
The head restraint can be removed and stored in the
space provided in the folded up seat cushion.
To fold the seatbacks on the bucket seats, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up. Then fold it
forward.
2. Pull the seatback
release lever up and
pull the seatback
forward. Then fold it
until it is flat.
. ...".. ...
"
"
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
1-20
Once the seatbacks are folded down,the rear seat
footwell area will be exposed and will have to be
covered by the load floor panel. To create a load floor,
do the following:
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
If you have removed the head restraints to fold the rear
bucket seat, be sure to reinstall them on the seatback
after it has been returned to the normal seating position.
1-21
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
~
Don’t let anyone ride where he orshe can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you arein a
crash and you’re not wearing a safetybelt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected fromit.
You can be seriously injured or killed.In the
same crash, you might notbe, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-22
It is extremely da -erous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.Do not
allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
WhySafety Belts Work
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle UP. See When you
ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
Safety Belt Reminder
it goes.
Light on page 3-37.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Aftermorethan 30 yearsof safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
I
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-23
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-25
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance.
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-26
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
A: You may be an excellent
This part is only for people of adult size.
I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
driver, but if you’re in an
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and chiidren. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-44
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-46. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-27
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-28
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-29
Q: What's wrong with this?
You c- be seriouslyhurt if yt ' st Jlder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-30
Q: What’s wrong with this?
I
You canbe s e _lus!yi Ired if
belt is
buckled in the wrong place likethis. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.The
belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
~
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-31
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
1
1
i
1
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-32
You ca.. Je ser-----g ir -,-red if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
Q: What's wrong with this?
'
1
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
1
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-33
Q: What’s wrong with this?
Youcan be seriousl, ~ ~
d bya~tv , I belt.~
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
~
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-34
~
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-35
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Center Passenger Position
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-28.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt-except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature
which may turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag. If this
happens unintentionally, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in the center seating position in the
second row you have a lap-shoulder belt which is similar
to the rear outside seating positions. To learn how to
wear this belt see “Lap-Shoulder Belt” under RearSeat
Passengers on page 1-38.
1-36
Lap Belt
When you sit in a center seating position other than in
the second row you have a lap belt.
A lap safety belt does not have a retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
1-37
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-38
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-39
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash.
1-40
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. Here’s how to install a
comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback.
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-41
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Third Row Seat
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-38.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Make sure you remove the comfort guide
from the belt before you fold a rear seat down or use an
easy-entry seat, if your vehicle has one.
1-43
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are saferif they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-44
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
L4:ff the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-41. If the child is
sitting in the second row center position, move the
child toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child a seat that has a lap belt, if
your vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-45
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied
right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in
CAUTION:
1-46
(Continued)
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
holL .t. Forexan ,~e, in z rashat c y 2 nph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person's
arms. A baby should be securedin an
appropriate restraint.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle.A baby doesn't weigh
much until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to
--
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-47
I
Children who are up against, or very close
to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-48
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for thehead and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest partof an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a bodyarea that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-49
/
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-50
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A buiit-in chiid restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-51
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that chldren are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless
your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and the
passenger air bag status indicator shows off. Never
put a rear facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat unless the air bag is off. Here’s why:
1-52
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be
very close to the inflating bag.
air Be sure the air
bag is off before using a rear-facing child
restraint i n the right frontseat position.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint rear
in a
seat.
Even thoughthe Passenger Sensing Systemis
designed to turnoff the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee thatan air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance,
even though it is
turned off. General Motors therefore
recommends that rear-facing child restraints be
secured i n the rear seat wheneverpossible,
even if the air bag
is off.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and
you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat, the passengers frontal
air bag must be off. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-76 and Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 1-64 for more on this
including important safety information.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or suddenstop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle- even when nochild is init.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-53
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
TahoelSuburbanNukonNukon XL models without
rear seats: Top strap anchor loops are located at
the bottom rear of the front seat cushion for the right
front passenger’s position.
SuburbanNukon XL Models without Rear Seats
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the
top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the
child restraint itself.
TahoelSuburbanNukonNukon XL models with rear
seats: A child restraint with a top strap should only
be used in the second or third row. Don’t use a
child restraint with a top strap in the front seat because
there’s no place to anchor the top strap.
1-54
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row, and for the center seating
position in the third row.
Third Row Bench Seat
SuburbanNukonXL Second Row Seat, Bucket
Seats Similar
TahoeNukon models: A child restraint with a top strap
should only be used in the second or third row. Don’t
use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position, because there’s no place to
anchor the top strap.
1-55
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for the center seating
position in the third row.
Third Row 50/50 Split Bench Seat
Lower Anchorages andTop Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. If it does,
you’ll find anchors (A) in the second row seats,
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system will have a visible metal anchorage point
in the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
1-56
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
1-57
1
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-58
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’tbe
able to protect a child sittingthere. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System’’ or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Center Rear Seat
Position’’ in the Index for information on how
to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-53. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and thendisconnect the
anchor points.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-56.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-53 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-59
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-60
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-56.
1-61
Second Row
The center seat position in the second row has a
lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. For
instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a
lap-shoulder belt see Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-59.
Third Row
The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
See Top Strap on page 1-53 if the child restraint
has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-62
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
iarger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints
won’t work properly.
1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
A child
arear-facing
d d restr It can !
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. Thisis because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air
bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat unless the air bag isoff.
~~
_I
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. Unless your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system, Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in this seat.
1-64
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and
you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat, the passenger’s air bag
must be off. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-76 and Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator on
page 3-38for more information on this including
important safety information.
~
,
~
~
~
~
i
i
~
~
~
i
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be
sure the air bag isoff before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
therefore recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat whenever
possible, even if the air bag is off.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-53 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint,
if you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position. See Power Seats
on page 1-4 or Manual Seats on page 1-3.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and you are using a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat, make sure the frontal air bag is off. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag, the off
indicator on the inside rearview mirror will light and
stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or
START.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-65
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-66
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and you’re using a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat, check to be sure the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag is off before you begin to drive. If the
air bag has been turned off, the off indicator will
light and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN
or START.
If the on indicator is lit, the passenger’s frontal air
bag has not been turned off. If this ever happens,
turn the vehicle off, unbuckle the safety belt
and perform the steps to install the rear-facing
restraint again. After restarting the vehicle, if the.air
bag still doesn’t turn off, install the infant restraint
in a rear seat position of the vehicle and have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt. You should not be able to pull more of
the belt out of the retractor once the lock has
been set.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-67
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right
front passenger, the words AIR BAG will appear on the
air bag covering on the side of the right front
passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
Your vehicle has air bags - a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
air bag. Side impact air bags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impactair bag for the driver,
the words AIR BAG will appear onthe air bag covering on
the side of the driver’s seatback closest
to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-68
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt- even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but don’t replacethem.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only
in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, in
or
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed
to inflate onlyin
moderate to severe crashes where something
CAUTION:
(Continued)
hits the side of your vehicle. They aren’t
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly - whether or not there’san air
bag for that person.
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink eye.
of an
If you’re too close an
to inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward,
it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for
air bag inflation before and
during a crash. Always
wear your safety belt,
even with frontal air bags.
The driver shouldsit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Front occupants should
not lean on or sleep against the door.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-38
for more information.
Anyone who is up against, or very closeto,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bagsplus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle.To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children”.
-
Where Are the Air Bags?
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the air
bag symbol.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-70
The right front passernger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air
bag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
1-71
If something isbetween an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properlyor it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
1-72
Frontal Air Bags
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph
(16 to 25 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
Seat Position Sensors
Vehicle’s with dual stage air bags are also equipped
with special sensors which enablethe sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the air bags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full depoyment.
Side Impact Air Bags
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-68. Side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Air Bag Systems
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle in the
Index for tips on off-road driving.
1-73
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
1-74
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicle’s with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side
of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
WIBum
an~air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which records
information about the frontal air bag system. The
module records information about the readiness of
the system and when the system commands
are bag inflation. It records the status of the driver’s
safety belt usage in a crash in which the air bag
deploys or a crash in which the air bag nearly
deploys. The module also records speed, engine
RPM, brake and throttle data.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-75
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Air
Bag Status Indicator on page 3-38.If your rearview
mirror doesn’t have either of the indicators pictured
below, then your vehicle doesn’t have the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Air
Bag Status
Indicator - Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal air bag under certain
conditions. The driver’s air bag and the side air bags
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presenceof
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator - United States
1-76
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag if:
the right front passenger seat is unoccupied,
the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat,
the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint,
the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat,
a right front passenger takes hidher weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints or a very small person,
or if there is a critical problem with the air bag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint or a booster seat
is detected. If the child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off, remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position on page 1-64 of this manual.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal air
bag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
air bag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the air bag is active.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person isn’t sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright position,
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart
the vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
air bag.
1-77
If the air bag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that somethingmay be wrong with the
air bag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal air bag. See “Air Bag Readiness
Light” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system.
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
I
I -78
Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There air bag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information onpage 7-1 1.
For up to 1 minute after the ignition keyis
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to doso.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might
add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air
bags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the air bag system
from working properly. Also, the air bag system
may not work properly if you relocate any of the air
bag sensors. If you have any questions about
this, you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
Air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-79
Restraint System Check
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
1-80
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using
it,resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seatparts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
L
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-81
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ........................................................... -2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.5
Doors and Locks ............................................. 2.8
Door Locks .................................................... 2.8
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2.9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2.10
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ...............................................
2.10
Rear Door Security Locks .............................. 2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2.12
....2.13
Liftgate .................................
Windows ........................................................ 2-15
Manual Windows .......................................... 2.16
Power Windows ............................................ 2.16
Sun Visors ...................................................
2.17
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2.18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................. 2.18
Passlock@.................................................... 2.20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.21
New Vehicle Break-in .................................... 2.21
Ignition Positions .......................................... 2.21
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.22
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................ 2.23
Engine Coolant Heater ................................. -2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2.25
Four-wheel Drive .......................................... 2.28
All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak@ .................2.32
Parking Brake .................................
.....2-35
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2-36
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2-38
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-39
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-40
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-40
Mirrors ........................................................... 2-42
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................. 2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Onstar@,Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................
2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-45
Outside Manual Mirrors .................................. 2-48
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ......................... 2-48
Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror .................2-49
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ..................... 2-49
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors .................... 2-50
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2-50
Outside Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-50
2- 1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Onstar@ System .................................
HomeLink@ Transmitter .......................
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
StorageAreas ....................................
Glove Box .......................................
Cupholder(s) ....................................
Front Storage Area ...........................
Center Console Storage Area .............
2-2
....-2-51
.......-2-53
........ 2.54
........2.57
........2.57
........2.57
........2.57
........2.57
,
Luggage Carrier ...........................................
Rear Storage Area ........................................
Convenience Net ..........................................
Cargo Cover ................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
Vehicle Personalization ...................................
Memory Seat ...............................................
2.57
2.59
2.59
2.59
2.60
2-61
2-61
Keys
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door
locks as well as the spare
tire hoist lock, if equipped.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6. If your vehicle is
equipped with theOnstar@system with an active
subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle,
Onstat-@ may beable to send a command to unlock
your vehicle. See OnStaP System on page2-51
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
a
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
0
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will come on. The ground illumination
lamps will come on. Pressing UNLOCK again within
three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock.
The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will
come on.
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. Wait one second, then press LOCK again and the
horn will chirp.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with
the theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2- 18.
2-5
Remote Alarm
Battery Replacement
When the panic button with the horn symbol on the
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound
and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the panic
button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the
vehicle.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2-6
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter
do the following:
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
1. Insert a dime, or similar object, in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing near the key
ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.
2-7
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system (if equipped).
Door Locks
/r\ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked.So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
You can also use your key.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the lever
rearward. To unlock the
door, slide the lever
forward.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle is equipped
with power door locks,
press the raised side of the
switch, with the lock
symbol, on either front
door to lock all the doors
at once.
Press the recessed side of the switch with the unlock
symbol, to unlock all the doors at once.
If your vehicle has the delayed locking feature, see
“Delayed Locking” later in this section.
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of
the switch on either front
door to lock all the doors
at once.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time even
when the ignition is off.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2- 18.
2-9
Delayed Locking
When you lock the doors using the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter with any door or
the liftgate open three chimes will signal that delayed
locking is being used.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. All doors and liftgate can be re-opened for
up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
You can lock the door immediately using the power
door lock switch or the optional remote keyless
entry transmitter a second time.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the
ignition.
To enable or disable the delayed locking feature, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
If the feature is disabled, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless
entry transmitter button is pressed.
2-10
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
if your vehicle has power door locks, it is equipped with
a feature that enables you to program your power
door locks.
Your vehicle left the factory programmed to
automatically lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted
out of PARK (P), and all doors unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). You can set the
automatic door lock feature to unlock the doors you
select once the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The following instructions detail how to program your
door locks.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Beginning with the ignition in LOCK. Pull back on
the turn signaVmultifunction lever all theway
toward you until flash-to-pass is activated, and hold
it while you perform the next step.
2. Turn your key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with
the key in LOCK, release the turn
signaVmultifunction lever. Once you do this, you will
hear the lock mechanism lock and unlock.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the following four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have
thirty seconds to begin programming. If you exceed
the thirty-second limit, the locks will automatically
lock and unlock to indicate you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure
beginning with Step 1.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock to indicate you are leaving the program mode). If
the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the
programming mode, the auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
The following is a list of the available programming
options:
e
All door locks/Only the driver’s door unlocks:
Press the lock side of the power lock switch on
ihe door pmei G W ~and then the unlock side once
e
All doors IocWAll doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
once, and then the unlock side twice.
All doors IocWNone of the doors unlock: Press
the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel once, and then the unlock side three times.
e
No doors IocWNone of the doors unlock: Press
the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel twice. This turns off the automatic lock
feature.
For more information, see your dealer
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
lock the rear side doors so they cannot be opened from
the inside by passengers.
This feature is located on
the inside edge of the
rear doors.
To use one of the locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. To engage the rear door security locks, move the
lever forward.
3. To disengage the lock, move the lever rearward.
4. Close the door.
5. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
The rear doors or your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-12
Liftgate
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass and liftgate.
It Can be dangerous to drive withtnn,liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate glass, liftgate
or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass through
the seal between the body and the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will
force outside air into your vehicle.
See
“Comfort Controls” in the Index.
0 If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
The liftgate glass can be opened using the button on
the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked. This can
be done by using either the power door locks or the
remote keyless entry system.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or
the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftgate
glass.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-13
Panel Doors
To open the rear panel doors, you must open the
passenger’s side panel door first. If the door is locked,
insert your door key in the lock and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
To open the passenger’s side panel door, pull on the
handle and pull the door open.
To open the driver’s side panel door, first open the
passenger’s side door. Then, pull the handle on the left
door edge out and pull the door open.
2-14
To close the doors, close the driver’s side door first.
After securely closing the door, close the passenger’s
side door. Make sure both doors are latched securely.
To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put your
key in the lock and turn it clockwise. If you have
power door locks, you can lock the side doors as well
as the rear doors from inside the vehicle. For more
information, see Power Door Locks on page 2-9 earlier
in this section.
Windows
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-15
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
Power Windows
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the side doors.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Ignition Positions on page 2-21.
Pull up the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
Press the forward edge of the switch to lower the
window.
Express-Down Windows
The driver and passenger windows also has an express
down feature that allows the windows to be lowered
without holding the switch. Press the front edge of the
window switch for one secondto activate the express
down mode. The express down mode can be canceled
at any time by pulling up on the switch. To open the
window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window
is at the desired position.
2-16
Lock-Out Switch
Sun Visors
If you have power windows, the driver’s door power
window switch has a lockout feature. The lockout switch
is located in front of the power window switches. This
feature prevents all windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position, when the front driver’s door
button labeled is engaged. To engage the lock-out
feature press the switch, and an indicator light
will illuminate. To disengage the feature, press the
switch again and the indicator light will go off. When the
button is not engaged, the passenger’s power windows
will operate.
To block out glare, you can swing down the top and
bottom visors (if equipped). You can also swing
the bottom visor from side-to-side. Your visors may
have an extension that can be pulled out for additional
glare protection.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
If equipped, pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror
cover to turn on the lamps. There is a slide switch
to adjust the brightness of the lamps.
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
security light will flash as
you open the door (if
your ignition is off), to let
you know that you are
activating the system.
2-18
This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and flash. If using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm
will not be activated until all doors are closed
and the security light goes off.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop flashing
and stay solid. The light should go off after
approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for
about two minutes, then will turn off to save the
battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or withthe remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm if the system
has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to
START.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door,
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
2-19
Passlock@
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock@theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
2-20
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock@ systemis
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock@ at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse (see
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.) See your
dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6
under Customer Assistance Information.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-in
C
Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed- fast or
slow - for the first500 miles (805 km). Don’t
make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles
(322km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet brokenin. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
A
L
A (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off.
2-2 1
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
Starting Your Engine
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
key or the ignition switch.If none of these works,
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
then your vehicle needs service.
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain
features on your vehicle to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (if equipped), and
Onstar@System (if equipped) will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Notice: Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessiveheat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging yourstarter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-22
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or -18"C), do this:
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
75 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since
the pedals can not move farther away from the standard
position, but can move forward for better pedal reach.
2. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the driver's side door
panel.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before addingelectrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don't, your engine
might not perform properly.
Press the arrow at the end of the switch closest to you
to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the
arrow at the far end of the switch to move the pedals
away from your body.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater
~
~
!
In very cold weather,0°F
(-18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can
help. You’ll get easier
starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater
should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours
prior to starting your
vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir. If you have a diesel engine, refer to
diesel supplement for location.
2-24
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 IO-volt AC outlet.
PIL,,--lg the cord into an una. wnded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster. This display must be
powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being
moved out of PARK (P).
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
CAUTION:
(Continued)
su enly. IU or 4 lers cl---- De injure - J
be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)”in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
If you have four- wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll- even if your shift leveris in
PARK (P) - if your transfer caseis in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four- wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) - not in
NEUTRAL. See ”Shifting into Park (P)” in
the index.
2-25
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-50.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle is
being towed.
Sh----ng into a
d.. e gear w Je your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drivegear while your engine
is racing.
.
!-26
...
Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by
shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with
the engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If
you need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD ( 3 )
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
Tow/HauI Mode
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: If your rear wheels won’t turn, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal.
This could overheat and damage the transmission.
Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold
your vehicle in position on ahill.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow/haul mode. If
so, the selector button is located on the end of the
column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-59 for more information.
2-27
When tow/haul mode is
selected the tow/haul
indicator light will
illuminate.
The tow/haul mode also interacts with the AutorideTM
feature, if your vehicle is so equipped, to enhance
the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See
AutorideTM on page 4-58.
Four-wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. See
the appropriate text for the transfer case in your
vehicle.
Notice: Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4HI) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4LO) positions for a long time on
dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of
your vehicle’s drivetrain.
2-28
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or 1 -ock is normal.
SI_ _ _ _ _ _ _ re transfer case to
- . ’ R L can
cause your vehicle to rolleven if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See ”Parking Brake” in
the Index.
~
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument pane!
cluster.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle
in AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels. When
the vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system
will automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy
than 2HI.
(4HI): Use the 4HI position when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive.
You can choose among four driving settings:
a(2HI): This setting is used for driving in most street
(4LO): This setting also engages your front axle
and delivers extra torque. You may never need
this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in
deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing
or descending steep hills.
and highway situations. Your frontaxle is not engaged
in two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the
best fuel economy.
2-29
If the SERVICE 4WD message stayson, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See ”Service
4WD message” under Driver lnformafion Center (DIC)
on page 3-52.
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See ”Parking Brake” in
the Index.
Shifting into 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4 hi or AUTO 4WD switch. This
can be done at any speed (except when shifting
from 4LO), and the indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting into 2HI
Press and release the 2 hi switch. This can be done at
any speed (except when shifting from 4LO).
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-53 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page4-53 for more information.
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
2-30
Shifting into 4LO
To shift to the 4 lo position, the ignition must be in RUN
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press
and release the 4 lo switch. You must wait for the
4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
If the 4 lo switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds
the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting out
of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 rnph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear.
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roil
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
7. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
8. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
9. Turn the ignition to OFF.
10. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
11. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
2-31
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak@
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
all the time.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD OR 4 LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjust itself as needed for
road conditions.
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument panel
cluster.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to
enter the shift protection mode. This will protect the
transfer case from possible damage and will only allow
the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10
seconds. The transfer case may stay in this mode for
up to three minutes.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive.
2-32
You can choose among three driving settings:
fa (Stabilitrak@): This button is used with the
Stabilitrak@ system andis also used to shift the transfer
case into Neutral. For more information on wing
Stabilitrak@ seeStabilitrap System on page 4- 11.
La
(All-Wheel Drive): This setting delivers power to
all four wheels as needed depending on road and
driving conditions.
m ( 4 L O ) : This setting delivers extra torque. You may
never need this setting. It sends maximum power to
all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you are driving
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and
climbing or descending steep hills.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-53 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-53 for more information.
indicator lights in the switches show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See
SERVICE 4WD under Driver lnformation Center ( D E )
on page 3-52.
Shifting into 4LO
Shifting the transfer caseto NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See ”Parking Brake” in
the Index.
To shift to the 4LO position, the ignition must be in RUN
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press
and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the
4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
2-33
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds
the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
When in 4L0, the vehicle stability is disabled. For more
information see Stabi/itrak@System on page 4-1 1.
Shifting Out of 4LO
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
To shift from 4LO to AWD your vehicle must be stopped
or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.
The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to
have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the AWD switch. You must wait
for the AWD indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear.
6. Shift the transfer case to AWD.
If the AWD switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the AWD indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
2-34
7. Simultaneously press and hold the Stabilitrak@ and
4LO buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL
light will come on when the transfer case shift
to NEUTRAL is complete.
8. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
10. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
’1.
Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (All-Wheel Drive or 4LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. YOU may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-59.
2-35
SYftinF Y o Park (P)
~~
.
I
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly.You or others
could be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. With four-wheel
drive, if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL,
your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL. If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-36
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
Pull the shift lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset.
0
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free
to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).
So be sure the transfer case isin a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down.
2-37
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into
PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called ”torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting lnto
Park (P) on page 2-36.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-25.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
2-38
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn
JS 1 tcan burn could touc
lot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-39
Enciqe Exhaust
m
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to ‘?ere are some thi7gs to know
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-40
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
”Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicleeven
if the fan isat the highest setting. One place
this can happen is agarage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
“Winter Driving” in theIndex.
It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer caseis in a drivegear - not
in NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-36.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-59.
2-4 1
Mirrors
The mirror also includes a duel display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
Manual Rearview Mirror
6 (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the comp/temp display on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Onstar@,Compass and
Temperature Display
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration, see
below.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
I
I
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing OF, or "C
appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will
return.
2-42
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
The electrochromic (self dimming) mirror function is
turned on automatically each time the ignition is started.
Po operate the electrochromic mirror do the following:
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
and hold the on/off button for approximately
six seconds until the green light comes on,
indicating that the mirror is in electrochromic (self
dimming) mode.
2. Turn off the electrochromic mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds until the green indicator
light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessaryto adjust the compassto compensate
for compass varianceif you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance
cross-country trip,it will be necessaryto adjust for
compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic northand true geographic
north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance,
your compasscould give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
2-43
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the comp/temp display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2-44
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
until the display reads a direction, or
drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after
several turns the compass will become calibrated
and will display a direction.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passengerair bag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If your vehicle has this feature, the mirror will displaythe
word ON, or an air bag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger air bag is engaged. For more information,
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76.
Cleaning the Mirror
Temperature Display
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To
alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks OF
and "C. Press and release the TEMP button to
toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings.
After approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display
will stop blinking and display the last selection made.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If your vehicle is equipped with an electrochromic
mirror, it will, when on, automatically dim to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you
after dark.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your
dealer.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at
the same time. The dual display can be turned on or off
by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP
button.
2-45
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
Compass Calibration
The time period you need to press and hold the TEMP
button to turn the electrochromic feature on or off is
approximately eight seconds. The indicator light to the
right of the TEMP button will still turn on or off to
show you when the electrochromic feature is activated.
Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it
is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
e
If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
e
After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
e
The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h)
or less until the display reads a direction, or
drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after
several turns the compass will become calibrated
and will display a direction.
2-46
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you h e outside
zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compassvariance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compasscould give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
Your mirror may be equipped with a passenger air bag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If you have this feature the mirror will display the word
ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger air bag is engaged. For more information see
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76
2-47
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror
performance.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with power outside mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
I
Move the selector switch located above the control pad
to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to
adjust, then press the dots located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
The mirrors also include a memory function which works
in conjunction with the memory seats. See “Memory
Seats” in the Index for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with outside power
camper-type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can
have a clear view of objects behind you.
To extend the mirrors move the selector switch, located
above the mirror control, to the middle position. The
mirror control will illuminate. Press the left side of
the mirror control to slide the mirror heads away from
the body of the vehicle. Press the right side of the mirror
control to slide the mirror heads toward the body of
the vehicle.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped with outside power foldaway
mirrors the mirrors can be folded in toward the body
of the vehicle.
The mirror glass on one or both sides of the vehicle
may automatically adjust before the mirror folds inward.
When the mirror glass or mirror starts moving, you
can release the mirror control.
To return the mirrors and the mirror glass to their
normal position press the left side of the mirror control.
If the mirrors are manually folded, use the power
mirror control to return it to it’s original position.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the
driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings found on the electrochromic
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display onpage 2-45.
To fold in the mirrors, move the upper selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle position.
Press the right side of the mirror control to fold the
mirrors toward the body of the vehicle.
2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has the optional memory package
you may have this feature.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
The vehicle’s mirrors are capable of performing the curb
view assist mirror function. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a short delay
has occurred, the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will
return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory as
the tilt position.
You may be able to enabled/disable this feature through
the Driver Information Center. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
I
A convex mlrror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors with this option have a
defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window
defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger”
under Dual Automatic Climate Control Systemon
page 3-24 for further information.
2-50
Onstar@System
Onstar@Services
Onstar@provides a number of service plans to closely
meet your needs. Some of the services currently
provided by Onstar@ are:
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock
Onstar@ usesglobal positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information and convenience services.
An Onstar@subscription plan is included in the price
of your vehicle. You can easily upgrade or extend your
Onstar@services to meet your personal needs.
A complete Onstar@ user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the Onstar@Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your Onstar@-equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue Onstar@button
to speak to an Onstar@ advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
Remote Diagnostics
Onstar@MED-NET (Requires separate activation
and annual fee on some plans)
Online and Personal Concierge Services
Route Support
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
2-5 1
Onstar@Personal Calling
With Onstar@Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts, no roaming charges and no access fees. To
find out more about Onstar@Personal Calling, refer
to the Onstar@owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove
box, or call Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
Onstar@Steering Wheel Controls
(((7: If your vehicle is
equipped with the steering
wheel control buttons
you can use them
to interact with the
OnStaP system.
Onstar@Virtual Advisor
With Onstar@Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes
and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of Onstar@services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for Onstar@Personal
Calling and Onstar@Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-52
See the Onstar@manual provided with your vehicle for
more information.
HomeLink* Transmitter
HomeLink@ a combined universal transmitterand
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink@ informationcan be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
2-53
Programming the HomeLink
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink@Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink@ programming.It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink@buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink@
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink@ onthe
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
2-54
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/orthird
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink@buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink@
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink@ and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink@ successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Homeiink@button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
begin with Step2 under “Programming HomeLink@.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns toa constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink@ buttonfor two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink@should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink@.”Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink@to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
2-55
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink@”procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink@”with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink@button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink@. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink@’
to complete.
Using HomeLinkO
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink@button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink@Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink@is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLinkO.”
2-56
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLinkO Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkO
Button
To program a device to HomeLinkO using a HomeLink@
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink@button. Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink@
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink@.”
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink@to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLinkO
indicator light turns off.
3.Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink@ at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area
Glove Box
Your vehicle may be equipped with a console
compartment between the bucket seats.
To open your glove box, lift up the latch and pull the
door open.
TG open it, press the button and swing the console
lid open.
The console has a place to store coins.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front
and rear floor console or in the second seat fold
down armrest and in the quarter trim.
Your console has a cupholder that swings down for the
rear seat passengers to use.
Luggage Carrier
Front Storage Area
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center armrest
storage compartment in the front bench seat.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact
disc holder.
The storage compartment also has a tray to use for
writing.
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than
200 Ibs. (91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carry large things, never
let them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. Load your cargo so that it rests on the slats
and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.Put
the cargo against the side rails and fastenit
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the mainweight
as far forward as youcan.
2-57
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see ”Loading Your Vehicle”.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind
the rear side door on SuburbanNukon XL Models).
If you need to, cut a piece of 3/%inch plywood to
fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread
the load. If plywood is used, tie it to the siderail
supports.
Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from
sliding. To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch
release handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to
the desired position balancing the force side to side.
Push the release handle back into the latched
position and slide the crossrail back and forth
slightly to be sure the latch snaps securely
into place.
If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load
so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are
damaged.
After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear
load doors.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
If your vehicle has the 271 option your vehicle’s
luggage carrier has a roller crossrail at the rear of the
vehicle.
To load cargo, place cargo on the roller and roll the
cargo forward onto the two front crossrails.
To move the crossrails do the following:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end.
2. Move crossrail to desired position.
3. Tighten the thumbscrews.
Make sure the crossrail is secured.
2-5%
Rear Storage Area
Cargo Cover
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s
side trim panel.
Cargo Tie Downs
To open the utility compartment, press in on the release
latch and swing the compartment door open.
To open the SuburbanNukon XL compartment, pull the
latch to access.
Your vehicle may be
equipped with cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow you
to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
Convenience Net
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of
the way.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-59
Sunroof
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays. The sunshade
will not close when the sunroof is open.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed, the
glass panel can be closed or opened.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracts.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to be active. See "Retained Accessory
Power" under Starting and Operating Your Vehicle.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To close the glass panel,
press and hold the front of the button. The glass will not
be fully seated unless the button is held until the
glass stops moving. With the sunroof closed, press the
forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the
vent position.
2-60
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof. To
do this, start the vehicle and press the forward side of
the sunroof switch until the glass panel moves to a fully
closed position. Release, and press again to move to
the vent position which occurs when the sunroof is fully
tilted rearward. This will reset the memory and enable
the sunroof to function properly.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, then the controls
for the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
To store your memory seat, throttle and brake pedals,
mirrors and radio presets, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, and side wing area), throttle
and brake pedals, both of the outside mirrors, and
the radio station presets to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 (for driver l o r 2) button
of the memory control for three seconds. A double
chime will sound to let you know that the position
has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, throttle and brake
pedals, both the driver’s and passenger’s outside mirror,
and the radio station presets. The settings for these
features can be personalized for both driver 1 and
driver 2. Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memory
buttons labeled land 2 on the driver’s door.
2-61
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s
seat, throttle and brake pedal, mirror positions and the
radio station presets will be recalled if programmed
to do so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,
correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.
The seat, throttle and brake pedals and mirror positions
can also be recalled when placing the key in the
ignition if programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
h This button is used to program and recall the
desired driver’s seat position when exiting/entering the
vehicle. The seat position, can be personalized for
both driver 1 and driver 2.
To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or 2, do the
following:
1. Select the desired driver number by pressing and
releasing the 1 or 2 button. The seat will move to
the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the identified driver (1 or 2).
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
Press the exit button on the memory control.
Or, if this feature is enabled (active) in the DIC,
then removing the key from the ignition will
cause the seat to move to the exit position.
2-62
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ............................... 3.4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................ 3.5
Other Warning Devices ................................... 3.6
Horn ............................................................-3-6
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3-6
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.7
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.13
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.17
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3.18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ 3.19
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.20
Climate Control System ................................. 3.20
Dual Climate Control System .......................... 3.21
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ..........-3-24
Rear Air Conditioning System ......................... 3.30
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System ..................................... 3.31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3.35
Instrument Panel Cluster ............................... -3-36
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3.37
Tachometer ................................................ -3-37
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.37
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-38
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator .................3.38
Battery Warning Light ............
.............3.4Q
Voltmeter Gage ........................
.........3.40
Brake
System
Warning
Light
..
.............3.41
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light ........................................... 3.42
Traction Off Light .......................................... 3.43
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3.44
-3-44
Transmission Temperature Gage ....................
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.46
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................ 3.49
3.49
Cruise Control Light ......................................
Four-Wheel-Drive Light .................................. 3.50
Tow/Haul Mode Light .................................... 3.50
Fuel Gage ................................................... 3-51
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................. 3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC) ....................... 3.52
DIC Operation and Displays ........................... 3.52
DIC Warnings and Messages ......................... 3.62
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3.70
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) .................................. 3.70
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ......................................... 3-71
AM-FM Radio ............................................... 3-71
Radio with CD .............................................. 3-74
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3-85
3- 1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................. 3-99
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3.113
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-122
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3.124
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3.124
DVD Distortion ............................................ 3.125
Understanding Radio Reception .................... 3.125
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-126
3-2
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-127
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-127
Cleaning the Video Screen ........................... 3.127
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 3.128
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System ...........-3-128
DAB Radio Antenna System ......................... 3.128
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3.128
I
0
c
I
0
T1
m
0
IA
A.DomeLamp Override Button
B.Lamp Controls
C. Air Outlets
D. Automatic Transfer Case/Stabilitrak@Mode Button
(AWD Vehicles)/Traction Assist System (TAS)
E. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
F. Instrument Panel Cluster
G. ShiftLever
H. Tow/Haul Selector Button
I. Audio System
J. Comfort Control System
K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
L.HoodRelease
M. Steering Wheel Control Buttons
N. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
0. Tilt Wheel Lever
P. ParkingBrakeRelease
Q. Lighter and Accessory Power Outlets
R. Storage Area (If Equipped)
S. Ashtray
T.Glovebox
Hazard Warning Flashers
.......
...........
....
...-....
...................................................................
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-5
The hazard warning
flasher is located at the top
of the steering column.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
your vehicle.
The tilt steering wheel
lever is located on the
lower left sideof the
column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn't in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (I00m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
3-6
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
00
TurnandLaneChangeSignals
-
EO HeadlampHigh/Low
Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Windshield
Wipers
@
WindshieldWasher
@
'
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 earlier in this section.
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers may not see your
turn signal.
3-7
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-To-Pass
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam
or push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as
long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam
headlamps off.
Windshield Wipers
: Mist
0: off
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to mist. Hold it
there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers
will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold
the band on mist longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
3-8
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the first solid band past the delay settings.
For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings. To stop the
wipers, move the band to off.
Rear Window WasherNViper
1
This control is located on
the instrument panel.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To
spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either
stop or return to your preset speed.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either
1 or 2. For long delayed wiping, turn the control to 1. For
short delayed wiping, turn the control to 2. To turn the
wiper off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the window, press the knob.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
3-9
Cruise Control
I
With cruise control, you
can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more without keeping
your foot on the
accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work
at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
0: off
t:
Resume/Accelerate
w : Set
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
disengage.
3-10
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safelyat a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever ana
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
I
The cruise light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch from on to
resume/accelerate briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you continue to hold the switch at resume/accelerate,
the vehicle will keep going faster until you release
the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-1 1
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get upto the speed
you want, andthen release the switch. To increase
your speed in very small amounts, movethe switch
to resume/acceleratebriefly. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Press and hold the set button at the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the set
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-12
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways cruise control can be turned off:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Move the cruise control switch to off.
Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N), or
If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak@ feature,cruise
control will automatically deactivate if road
conditions cause Stabilitrak@to activate.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position
puts the system into automatic headlamp mode. An
indicator light will illuminate when this position is
selected.
too:
(Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
0
SidemarkerLamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped)
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
0 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)and the automatic
headlamps. An indicator light will illuminate when
selected.
50 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pushing the turn signaVhigh-beam lever towards
the instrument panel.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on and
off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if
this happens.
3-13
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located
on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille.
Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
3-14
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure your instrumentpanel
brightness control is in the full bright position. See
“Instrument Panel Brightness Control” under Interior
Lamps on page 3- 17.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the control to the off position.
You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp
System. See ”Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information.
Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-52
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need them.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your
ignition is off, in LOCK, ACCESSORY, or your door is
open. To disable the chime, turn the light off then
back on.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. BRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
the ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is AUTO,
Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will allow you to
idle the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay
off until you shift the transmission out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime and
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the last
chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
3-15
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
in the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on your headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch
If your vehicle has this feature, this switch includes
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service
center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
This switch is located on
the center of the
instrument panel near the
comfort controls.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the switch will activate the lamp
and illuminate an indicator light near the switch. Pressing
the switch again will i x n off the roof mounted lamp.
3-16
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
G?:
his feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Front Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are
located on the overhead
console.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
headlamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio
display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps, turn the
thumbwheel all the way up.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will
not come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction
you want.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the out position.
If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on.
3-17
*:
You can use the dome override button, located
below the exterior lamps control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when a door is opened, or
to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button into
the in position. With the button in this position, the
dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
the button again and return it to the out position. With
the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on
when you open a door.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning
the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps
control, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
3-18
This feature shuts off the dome, reading, glove box and
underhood lamps if they are left on for more than
10 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep your
battery from running down.
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets, or
may have one accessory power outlet located near
the cigarette lighter, if equipped. The cigarette lighter is
designed to fit only in the receptacle to the right of
the accessory power outlet.
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it,
always close the cover.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull OR the ashtray door to open it.
Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damageit or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
3-19
Climate Controls
Temperature Knob
Climate Control System
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
f;' (Vent): This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
+?(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets
I'
'I
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
0
(Off): If the fan is off, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
3-20
as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor outlets depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
(Floor): This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided
between the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets.
(Defog): Airflow is delivered through the floor
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided
between floor and defrost depending upon where
the knob is placed between the settings.
12
3
9 (Defrost): This setting directs most air through the
windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the floor outlets.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
2
(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel vents.
+?
(Bi-Level): This mode directs haif of the air to the
instrument panel vents; then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor vents. A little air is directed
toward the windshield and the side window vents. Cooler
air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to
the floor vents.
4
2 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window vents.
@ (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan. If
the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature levers.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
(Recirculation): The recirculation mode is used
to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this
mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust
from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside
of your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to
turn the recirculation mode on or off. The light on the
recirculation button will illuminate. Recirculation cannot
be used in floor, blend or defrost modes. An indicator
on the button will light up, flash three times and turn off
when recirculation is selected in these modes.The
air-conditioning compressor will also come on when this
mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the
windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp.
To clear the fog, select either the blend or defrost
mode and increase fan speed.
3-21
Temperature Control
Defogging and Defrosting
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate
control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This lever also
adjusts the temperature to the center console outlets
(if equipped).
There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to removefog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the
climate control panel is used to raise or lower the
temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
select one of the following modes:
)#t (Air Conditioning): Press
this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on and the
system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside
of your vehicle. You may notice a slight change in
engine performance when the air conditioning
compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is
normal.
3-22
+3
(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor
outlets, windshield and the side window vents. The air
conditioning compressor will run automaticallyto
dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging. The
recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window vents, with only a
little air directed to the floor vents. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located
in the center and on the
side of your instrument
panel to direct the airflow.
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
several minutes after the button is pressed. Pressing the
button while the defogger is running can also turn off
the defogger.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice; Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Donot attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel next
to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For
the most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep
the outlet in the fully opened position.
Rear seat outlets can be used to adjust airflow toward
either seating area, the floor or upward. Move the center
louvers up or down to direct the airflow.
3-23
Operation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Your vehicle may have the optional dual automatic
climate control system. With this system you can control
the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
f
:L...
If your vehicle is equipped with the dual automatic
climate control system, memory seats, and memory
mirrors, you can store and recall theclimate control
settings for temperature, air delivery mode, and
fan speed for two different drivers. The personal choice
settings recalled are determined by the transmitter
used to enter the vehicle. After the button with
the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, the climate control will adjust to the last
settings of the identified driver. The settings can also be
changed by pressing one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) located on the driver’s door. When adjustments
are made, the new settings are automatically saved
for that driver.
v (Fan): Press this button to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
3-24
0(Off):
Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. This direction can
be changed by pressing the mode button. The
temperature can aiso be adjusted using either
temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, or
the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it
is off.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing to the driver; The
temperature can be adjusted even if the system is
turned off. If the passenger’s set temperature has not
been adjusted this knob controls both the driver’s
and passenger’s air temperature. The temperature to
the rear seat area is controlled by using this knob.
@*
(Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
delivery mode to the floor, panel, or windshield
outlets. This system will stay in the selected mode until
the mode button is pressed again, or the AUTO
button, defrost button, or the off button is pressed. Air
delivery mode can be adjusted while the system is off.
A five second status display will indicate the
current mode.
4#
Display: In the full AUTO mode, the automatic dual
climate control system display will show the driver
set temperature and an arrow pointing to the driver‘s
side. An arrow pointing to the passenger’s side will
display if both sides are set to the same temperature. If
the temperature settings are not the same, the
opposite side temperature setting will be displayed for
an additional five seconds. During the five second status
display the current mode and blower speed will be
displayed.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or
lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing
to the passenger. The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off. Once this knob is used,
the passenger’s temperature will remain independent
of the driver’s until the AUTO button is pressed and held
for approximately four seconds.
3-25
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature,
delivery mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO
button again within five seconds to display
the passenger’s set temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for approximately four seconds.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
3-26
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F
(23°C) temperature setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to regulate. Turn the
driver’s or passenger’s side temperature knob
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If
you choose the temperature setting of 60°F
(15°C) the system will remain at the maximum
cooling setting. If you choose the temperature
setting of 90°F (32°C) the system will remain at the
maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum
setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any
faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air
is available. The length of delay depends on
the engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan
switch will override this delay and change the fanto
a selected speed.
Manual Operation
'/i
(Fan): T ~ I S
button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor vents. Some air also comes out of the defroster and
side window vents. Use this mode to send air to the
rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats
free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear
of the vehicle. The recirculation button cannot be
selected in the floor mode.
**
&I (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
recirculation mode on or off. The recirculation mode is
used to limit the amount of outside air entering your
vehicle. This is helpful when you are trying to prevent
outside odors and/or dust from entering your vehicle, or
to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more quickly.
When this mode is on, inside air will recirculate
throughout your vehicle. When this button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will also come on to
let you know that it is activated.
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
A@ V
*# (Mode): Press this button
to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
f;' (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel vents.
+2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel vents, then directs the remaining air to
the floor vents. A little air is directed toward the
windshield and the side window vents. Cooler air is
directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the
floor vents.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog, or
floor, the light on the button will flash and go out to let
you know this is not allowed. This is to prevent
windshield fogging.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using the recirculation
mode. If the windows do start to fog, select defog or
front defrost mode.
3-27
e A/C (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to
manually turn the air-conditioning system on or off.
When the system is selected, or in AUTO mode
the system will automatically begin to cool and
dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle.
If you select air conditioning off while in front defrost, or
defog mode the air conditioning off symbol will flash
to let you know this is not allowed.
(Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The systemwill automatically
control the fan speed if you selectdefrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer,
your air conditioning compressor will automatically runto
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Rear Window Defogger
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
% (Air Conditioning Off):
(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
When you turn the air
conditioning off, this symbol will appear on the display.
When the air conditioning is selected or in AUTO
mode, the system will run the air conditioning
automatically.
Defogging and Defrosting
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
+3(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this
setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
3-28
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
If you vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button
will activate them.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a
decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
.
... .
,,
Operation Tips
Use the air outlets located
in the center and on the
side of your instrument
panel to direct the airflow.
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel next
to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For
the most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep
the outlet in the fully opened position.
If your vehicle is equipped with rear seat outlets they
can be used to adjust airflow toward either seating area,
the floor, or upward. Move the center louver up or
down to direct the airflow.
3-29
Rear Air Conditioning System
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional rear air
conditioner it has two rear air conditioning fan speed
selectors. One fan speed selector is located in the
overhead console and the other is located in the
headliner above the second row seats.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase the
flow of cooled air, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease
the flow of cooled air, turn it counterclockwise. To
turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
To operate the rear system using the front control, just
turn the knob to the fan position you want.
AUX A/C
I
Front Control
To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the
rear vents, turn the knob to the fan speed you want.
3-30
I
I
Rear Control
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
increase and decrease the airflow.
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System
If your vehicle is equipped with this system, there are
controls located in the overhead console and on
the back of the console in the rear seat area. The
system can be controlled from the front controls as well
as the rear controls.
0 (Off): An off setting, located on the front climate
control panel also allows the driver to turn off the
rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the read area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
2
3
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
2
(Vent): This setting directs the air through the
console outlets.
Front Control
The front control has three knobs that control airflow
speed, temperature and airflow location.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow,turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
+g(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the console outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
(Floor): This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets
3-31
Temperature Knob
so
'
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the read area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
2
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
Rear Controls
fi
The rear seat controls have three knobs that control
airflow speed, temperature and airflow location.
(Vent): This setting directs the air through the
console outlets.
Fan Knob
(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor outlets depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
0
(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn the rear
seat comfort controls on or off.
3-32
+2
(Floor): This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
If your vehicle is equipped with this system, there are
controls located in the overhead console and on
the back of the console in the rear seat area. The
system can be controlled from the overhead controls or
the rear controls.
The overhead control has three knobs that control
airflow speed, temperature and airflow location.
To adjust the airflow speed turn the knob located on the
left side of the control panel. To adjust the air
temperature turn the temperature knob on the center of
the control panel to increase or decrease the
temperature. To regulate airflow location adjust the right
knob on the control panel.
The system also AUTO settings that can automatically
control the fan speed and/or mode of the air delivery
to the rear seating area.
0 (Off): An off setting, located on the overhead
climate control panel also allows the driver to turn
off the rear seat passenger seat controls from the
front seat.
Front Controls
3-33
The rear seat controls have the following settings:
6 (On/Off):
Press this button to turn the rear seat
comfort controls on or off.
+2
(Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery,
and setting, and AUTO mode.
&
(Temperature): Press this button up or down to
increase or decrease the temperature setting.
A 88 v
(Fan): Press this button up or down to adjust
the fan speed.
Rear Controls
3-34
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a driver information system that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
3-35
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
Press the reset button to toggle between the trip
odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for two seconds while the trip odometer is
displayed will reset it.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The odometer can also display the number of hours the
engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the
ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for
up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
3-37
Air Bag Readiness Light
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag
sensors, the air bag modules, the passenger sensing
system (if equipped), the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
air bag system, see Air Bag Systems on page 7-68.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
your rearview mirror will havea passenger air bag status
indicator.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
L
I
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator - United States
Passenger Air Bag
Status Indicator
- Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger air bag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check.
3-38
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the statusof the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
air bag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal air I J is enabled (may inflate).
If the ON indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal air bag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to the inflating airbag. Don’t use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the air bag has been
turned off.
If the word OFF is lit on the air bag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76 for more on
this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
:he _. inc.,atora..eair L-3 reac ess
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, becausean adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger
seat may not have the protection of the
frontal air bag. See ”Air Bag Readiness Light”
in the Index.
3-39
Battery Warning Light
If this light is displayed
when the engine is
running, you may have a
problem with your charging
system.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the light stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this light displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and the air conditioner.
3-40
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging systemto create maximum power.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
You can only drive for a shorttime with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you
try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime
will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
BRAKE
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
3-41
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehic‘ on page 4-53.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
3-42
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal. If the light doesn’t
come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a
problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the car is shut off and then
restarted. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-41 earlier in this section.
Traction Off Light
If you move the shift lever to FIRST ( l ) , the light
will come on and stay on to indicate that the
traction system is off. This is normal operation. To
turn the system back on, move the shift lever
back to a position other than FIRST (1); the light
should go off. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on
page 4-9.
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to RUN.
I
The light will come on and stay on if the TAS
automatic engagement feature has been turned off.
To turn the system on, press the TAS off/on
button; the light should go off. To turn the automatic
engagement feature back on, see Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
there may be a problem with your Traction Assist
System and your vehicle may need service. When this
light is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The traction off light may come on for the following
reasons:
0
If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS
on/off button located to the left of the steering wheel,
the light will come on and stay on. To turn the
system back on, press the button again; the light
should go off.
0
If the Traction Assist System is affected by an
anti-lock brake system, TAS or engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the light will
come on. Have your vehicle serviced.
If the vehicle is driven over an extremely rough
road, the system will turn off and the light will come
on. The light will go off a few seconds after the
rough road conditions go away or when the vehicle
comes to a complete stop. This is normal
operation.
3-43
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Transmission Temperature Gage
7
7
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (1 25°C)mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.
3-44
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about
265°F (130°C).
At approximately 265°F (1 30°C), the message center
will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and
the transmission will enter a transmission protection
mode. When the transmission enters the protection
mode, you may notice a change in the transmission
shifting patterns. The transmission will return to normal
shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature
falls below 260°F (127°C).
See Driver lnformation Center(DlC) on page 3-52 for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the Driver
lnformation Center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE
ENG warning message. Pull the vehicle off the roadway
when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake, place
the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the engine
to idle until the transmission temperature falls below
260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues to operate
above 265°F (13O"C), contact your nearest dealer or
the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above the normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
0
Towinga trailer
0
Hot outside air temperatures
0
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
3-45
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-46
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacementof the original tires
with other than those of thesame Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come
on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by yourwarranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
0
Reducingvehiclespeed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoidinghardaccelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-9. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-47
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn oft,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
3-48
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
Dc t kc .
J if
theoilpressureis
low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
1
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See Oil Pressure Low under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-62 and Engine Oil on
page 5- 17.
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly andis not covered by
your warranty.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control’’ under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7.
3-49
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
-
The four-wheel drive
indicator will light up when
you shift a manual
transfer case into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal.
See Four-wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more
information.
3-50
Tow/HauI Mode Light
*
7
This light is displayed
whenthetow/haulmode
has been activated.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-59.
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
Low Fuel Warning Light
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out or
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-52.
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
3-5 1
Driver Information Center (DIC)
D (Select): This button resets certain functions and
turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC.
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster above the steering wheel. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy and
personalization features.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you will not have all of the features listed
above, and you will turn off, or acknowledge DIC
messages by using the trip odometer reset stem located
on the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge any current warning or service messages.
A (Trip Information): This button will display the
odometer, personal trip odometer, business trip
odometer, hourmeter, annual log and the timer.
B (Fuel Information): This button will display the
current range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
C (Personalization): This button will change personal
options available on your vehicle.
3-52
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons
are trip information, fuel information, personalization
and select. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons not all of the features listed will be
available on your vehicle.
Trip Information Button
Use the trip information button to scroll through the
SEASON ODOMETER, PERSONAL TRIP ON/OFF,
BUSINESS TRIP ON/OFF, HOURMETER, ANNUAL
LOG and TIMER. If the personal trip and/or the business
trip are set to ON, you will also be able to scroll
through more messages. See Personal Trip and
Business Trip next for more information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you can select the trip information
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
PERSONAL: AVG MPH - This shows the vehicle’s
average speed for the personal trip.
PERSONAL: o/o ANNUAL - This shows the ratio of
personal trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
You can reset the personal trip odometer by pressing
and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
Business Trip
If the BUSINESS TRIP is on (turn it on or off by
pressing the select button) you will also be able to scroll
through the following:
e
BUSINESS: XX MI - This shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for the
business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
e
BUSINESS: XX.X MPG - This shows the amount
of fuel used for the business trip.
e
BUSINESS: AVG ECONOMY - This shows how
many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is
getting for the business trip based on current and
past driving conditions.
Personal Trip
If the PERSONAL TRIP is on (turn it on or off by
pressing the select button) you will also be able to scroll
through the following:
e
PERSONAL: XX MI - This shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for the
personal trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
e
PERSONAL: XX.X MPG - This shows the amount
of fuel used for the personal trip.
e
PERSONAL: AVG ECONOMY - This shows how
many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is
getting for the personal trip based on current and
past driving conditions.
BUSINESS: AVG MPH - This shows the vehicle’s
average speed for the business trip.
BUSINESS: Yo ANNUAL - This shows the ratio of
business trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
3-53
To reset the personal or business trip information, do
the following: press and hold select button for two
seconds while in one of the personal or business trip
modes. This will reset all of the information for the
personal or business trip, or if your vehicle does not
have the DIC steering wheel control buttons, press the
reset stem on the instrument panel cluster.
Annual Log
You can also reset the PERSONAL: XX MI, or
BUSINESS: XX MI, while they are displayed by pressing
the reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold
the reset stem or select button for four seconds,
the display will show the distance traveled since the last
ignition cycle for the personal or business trip.
Timer
Season Odometer
Press the trip information button, or the trip odometer
reset step, until SEASON ODOMETER appears on
the display. This shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles or kilometers. Pressing the
reset stem located on the instrument cluster with
the vehicle off will also display the season odometer.
Hourmeter
Press the trip button to scroll to the hourmeter. The
hourmeter shows the total number of hours the engine
has run. Pressing the reset stem on the instrument
cluster will also display the hourmeter after the season
odometer is displayed.
3-54
Press the trip button, or the reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster, to scroll to the annual log. The annual
log shows the mileage accumulated since it was
last reset. To reset the annual log, press and hold the
select button, or the trip odometer reset stem for
approximately two seconds.
The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the select
button, or the trip odometer reset stem, while TIMER
is displayed to start the timer. The display will show the
amount of time that has passed since the timer was
last reset (not including time the ignition is off). Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on,
even if another display is being shown on the DIC. The
timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (995959) after which the display will roll
back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button, or the trip odometer reset stem, while TIMER is
displayed.
Fuel Information Button
Instant Fuel Economy
Use the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life SystemTM.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel control buttons you will not be able to display the
fuel information.
Press the fuel information button until INST appears in
the display. Instant fuel economy is how many miles
per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment
in time. The instant fuel economy cannot be reset.
Fuel Range
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW if
the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until AVG appears in
the display. Average fuel economy is how many
miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on current
and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button while AVG.ECON is
displayed to reset the average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy will then be calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it
will be continually updated each time you drive.
GM Oil Life SystemTM
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life SystemTM
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It
will show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life after and oil change. To
reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select
button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So, be
sure to check your oil level often. See Engine Oil on
page 5- 17.
3-55
Personalization Button
EASYEXITSEAT
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button
to scroll through the following personalization features.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
DISPLAYUNITS (E/M)
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you will not have any of these
personalization options except for DISPLAY
LANGUAGE. See DISPLAY LANGUAGE later in this
section for more information.
ALARMWARNINGTYPE
AUTOMATICLOCKING
DISPLAYLANGUAGE
The driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2
located on the driver’s door.
Alarm Warning Type
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning type, press the
select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
AUTOMATICUNLOCKING
SEATPOSITIONRECALL
PERIMETERLIGHTING
REMOTELOCKFEEDBACK
REMOTEUNLOCKFEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
CURB VIEWASSIST
3-56
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The
the alarm is active.
horn will chirp when
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps
when the alarm is active.
will flash
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on alarm warning type, see Content
Theft-Deterrenton page 2- 18.
Automatic Locking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic locking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Doors Locks.
Automatic Unlocking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select
your personalization for automatic unlocking, press the
select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The
unlocked automatically.
LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The
be locked automatically.
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted in PARK (P).
doors will not
LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
doors will not be
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks.
3-57
Seat Position Recall
Perimeter
Lighting
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears on the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): The memory
seat position you saved will only be recalled when the
memory button 1 or 2 is pressed on the driver’s
door panel.
PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it
is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
put the key in the ignition.
PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Choose on of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position recall see Memory Seat on
page 2-61.
3-58
(,
Remote Lock Feedback
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select
your personalization for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The
parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the iock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The
parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press
the unlock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There
when unlocking the vehicle.
will be no feedback
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
2-59
Headlamps on at Exit
Curb View Assist
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON
AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW
ASSIST appears in the display. To select your
personalization for curb view assist, press the select
button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 60 SEC
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 120 SEC
HEADLAMPSDELAY: 180 SEC
HEADLAMPSDELAY OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-60
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on curb view assist, see Curb View Assist
Mirrors in the Index.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your personalization
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT is displayed on the BIG. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
SEAT POSITION EXIT OFF (default): The driver’s seat
will move to the exit position when the exit button on
the driver’s door panel is pressed.
SEAT POSITION EXIT ON: The driver’s seat will move
to the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on the seat position exit see Memory Seat
on page 2-61.
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
Display Language
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following languages:
0
English
French
0
Spanish
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four
seconds, as long as you are in the season
odometer mode.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
UNITS:ENGLISH
UNITS:METRIC
3-61
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
French will be in French and so on. When you see
the language that you would like, release both buttons.
The DIC will then display the information in the
language you chose.
Select Button
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example,
this button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through the
languages you can select the DIC to display information
in.
from the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. See Engine Oil, When
to Change under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If the engine coolant level is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Adding coolant will clear the
message.
DIC Warnings and Messages
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. If there is more than one message
that needs to be displayed they will appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action but you should press the select button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the
engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to safe operating
temperature.
3-62
ENGINE OVERHEATED
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing the
select button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
SERVICE AIRBAG
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do notoperate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
If there is a problem with the air bag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Pressing
the select button will acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot andthe engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-30 for further
information.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If there is a problem with the brake system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service.
3-63
SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER
If your vehicle has vaccum assist power brakes, this
message will be displayed on the DIC when there is a
problem with the Supplemental Brake Assist system.
If the message is displayed immediately after starting
the vehicle or the message appears while driving,
your Supplemental Brake Assist system needs service.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41.
(Continued
pedal will be harder to push andit will take
longer to stop. If you continue to drive with
this message displayed it can lead to a crash.
Have the brake system serviced as soon as
possible.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER
Your brake system may not be \ rking
properly if the SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER
message is displayed.
If the brake system warning light
is also on,
you should have the vehicle towed for service.
See “Brake System Warning Light”in the Index.
If the brake system warning light isn’t
on, you
still have brakes, but the supplemental brake
assist system may not operate properly.
In
theevent of a vacuum
loss, you may not have
vacuum power assist for braking.
The brake
CAUTION:
3-64
(Continued)
If a problem occurs with the 4 wheel steer system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible, and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the four wheel
steer system needs service.
SERVICE 4WD
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system
this message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the four wheel
drive system needs service.
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN, this
message will appear on the DIC display and you
will hear a chime. Turn the vehicle off and check the
liftgate. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
REDUCED BRAKE POWER
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
If your vehicle has vacuum assist power brakes, this
message will be displayed and you may notice that the
brake pedal is harder to push and it will take longer
to stop. You may also hear a motor running and feel a
slight vibration in the brake pedal or steering wheel
when you apply or release the brake pedal even if your
foot is not on the brake pedal. This indicates that the
Supplemental Brake Assist system is working to
maintain braking power. If you are braking lightly, you
may not notice any difference in the operation of
your brakes.
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed, or appears again when you
begin driving, the ride control needs service.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Move the turn signaVmultifunction lever to
the off position. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
3-65
This message may also be displayed for brief periods if
you are driving at higher elevations and are pumping
your brakes or braking hard. The message may
clear after you’ve lifted your foot from the accelerator
pedal an allowed the vehicle to coast in gear or after you
have driven down to a lower elevation. This is a
normal operation of your brake system and does not
require that the brake system be serviced. However, if
the message does not clear, your brake system
needs service. While the message is displayed you will
notice that the brake pedal is harder to push and it
will take longer to stop. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-4 1.
Your brake system may ne--Je working
properly if the REDUCED BRAKE POWER
message is displayed. If this message comes
on and stays on while driving,pull off the road
and stop carefully. The brake pedal will be
harder to push andit will take longer to stop.
I
3-66
CAUTION: (Continued)
If the message is no longer displayedafter you
have pulled off the road and stopped, you can
continue driving.
However, if the message is still displayed, or if
it comes on again when youare driving, there
is a problem with your brake system.
If you
continue to drive with thismessage displayed
it can lead to an accident.You should have the
vehicle towed for service. Also, see Brake
System Warning Light in theIndex.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing the select button will acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check and oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
the select button will clear this message from the DIC
display.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, the
message center will display this message.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
When the transmission enters the protection mode, y ~ u
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
if the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing the select button will acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message
displayed, you can damage the transmission. This
could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered
under your warranty.
TRACTION ACTIVE
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are spinning, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. For more information see Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler.
3-67
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-68
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed,this
message will appear on the display and you will hear
a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display.
RFA # BATTERY LOW
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
SERVICE STABILITY
STABILITY SYS DISABLED
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, it
means there may be a problem with your
Stabilitrak@ system.If you see this message try to reset
the system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the
engine again). If the SERVICE STABILITY message still
comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer for sewice. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of Stabilitrak@,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the Stabilitrak@button, or when the
stability control has been automatically disabled. To limit
wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
Stabilitrak@on. However, you should turn Stabilitrak@off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow
and you want to “rock your vehicle to attempt to free it,
or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If You Are Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-50. To turn the
Stabilitrak@system back on press the Stabilitrak@button
again. There are four conditions that can cause this
message to appear. One condition is overheating, which
could occur if Stabilitrak@activates continuously for
an extended period of time. The message will also be
displayed if the brake system warning light is on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-47. The
message could be displayed if the stability system takes
longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks
due to driving conditions. Also, if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected, and the vehicle
needs service, the message will appear.
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you’re steering.
Stabilitrak@activates when the computer senses that
your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit
a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.
When the system activates, you may hear a noise or
feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When
the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on, you
should continue to steer in the direction you want to go.
The system is designed to help you in bad weather
or other difficult driving situations by making the most of
whatever road conditions will permit.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-69
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle - like a tape player,CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio - be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine,
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operationof sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Find out what your audio system can do and
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting
the most out of the advanced engineering that went
into it.
3-70
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your
audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition
Positions on page 2-21.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press the HR (down) arrow until the correct
hour appears on the display. Press and hold the
MIN (up) arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. The time may be set with the ignition on
or off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
AM-FM Radio
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display instead.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between time and radio station frequency. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
3-71
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch the display between
time and radio station frequency. Time display is
available with the ignition turned off.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
4
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds and flash
the station frequency, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds
and flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again
to stop scanning presets.
This radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
3-72
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
AUDIO repeatedly until BAS or TRE appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up or the down
arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, selecr
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab
model.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealership for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
Theftlock@system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
returned to the dealership for service.
3-73
Radio with CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Base Radio Shown, Bose@Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose@audio
system, your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified
speakers.
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-74
XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a
continental U.S. based satellite radio service that
offers 100 coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XMTM service. For more
information, contact XMTM at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With
automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, push this knob to change what appears on
the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY and the
name of the program (if available).
For XMTM (USAonly, if your radio is equipped with
XMTMSatellite Radio Service), push this knob while in
XM mode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing and
releasing this knob, you may retrieve four different
categories of information: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY, Channel NumberKhannel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
3-75
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
FM2, or XMI, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped
with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DABl, DAB2
(Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The
display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display will
show your selections.
4
SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4 SCAN b : Press and hold one of the arrows
for more than two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep. The radio will scan to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. SCAN will be
displayed. Press one of the arrows again to stop
scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
arrows for more than four seconds. The radiowill
produce two beeps. The radio will scan to the first preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
preset station. PSCN will be displayed. Press one of the
arrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-76
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (BassTTreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA
only, if your radio is equipped with the XM Satellite
Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only,
if your radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass, midrange or treble level. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2, or
XM2, or DABl, DAB2.
XMI,
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station
you are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose bass and treble equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-77
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS, XMTMand DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3-78
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to
take you to the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice
to display the category and then to go to another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
within your chosen category.
4. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
pushbutton.
3-79
When a message is not available from an station,
NO INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
display while the announcement plays. If the compact
disc player was being used, play will stop during
the announcement.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio
Service.
3-80
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your
radio can interrupt the
play of a CD, or XMTM, or DAB station. Press the
TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. TRAF will appear on the display. When atraffic
announcement comes on the station that was found,
you will hear it. When the traffic announcement is over,
the radio will resume play of the CD, or XMTM, or
DAB station. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear
on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
XMTMRadio Messages
Radio Display
Action
Message
Condition
Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
I
CH Unavail
his time on this
3-81
XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d)
I
Radio Display
Message
Condition
I
Action Required
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No TextAnformational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
No Info
~~
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes?XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
XM Locked
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-82
Playing a Compact Disc
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
TUNE or the eject symbol.
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display. If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track numberwill appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
4
SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-83
4
SCAN b : To scan the disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the disc.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
(Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-84
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio with Cassette and CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Base Radio Shown, BoseB Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Base@ audio
system, your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified
speakers.
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a
continental U.S. based satellite radio service that
offers 100 coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XMTMservice. For more
information, contact XMTMat www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-85
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
3-86
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, push this knob to change what appears on
the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY and the
name of the program (if available).
For XMTM (USA only,if your radio is equipped with
XMTMSatellite Radio Service), push this knob while in
XM mode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing and
releasing this knob, you may retrieve four different
categories of information: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped
with XMTM Satellite Radio Service) or DAB1, DAB2
(Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The
display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are withina frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display will
show your selections.
4
SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4
SCAN b : Press and hold one of the arrows
for more than two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep. The radio will scan to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. SCAN will be
displayed. Press one of the arrows again to stop
scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
arrows for more than four seconds. The radio will
produce two beeps. The radio will scan to the first preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
preset station. PSCN will be displayed. Press one of the
arrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-87
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (BasdTreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA
only, if your radio is equipped with the XM Satellite
Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only,
if your radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2, or XMI,
XM2, or DAB1, DAB2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station
you are listening to.
5 . Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose bass and treble equalization settings
designed for country/western,jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-88
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS, XMTMand DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to
take you to the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice
to display the category and then to go to another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
within your chosen category.
4. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
3-89
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for XMTM or DAB.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-90
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. The traffic symbol and TRAFwill appear on the
display while the announcement plays. If the compact
disc player was being used, play will stop during
the announcement.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a cassette, CD, or XMTM, orDAB station.
Press the TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements. When the
radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. TRAF will appear on the
display. When a traffic announcement comes on
the station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the cassette, CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no
station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system haslocked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio
Service.
3-91
XMTMRadio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Action Required
Condition
~~~~~
~
~
~
~
~~~~~~~~~
~~~~
~
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
CH Unavail
No info
No Info
3-92
XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
io ID not knownIfyou
receive this messagewhenyou tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
eiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
3-93
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject symbol to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the eject symbol or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
3-94
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. If you press the pushbutton more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through thetape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the
display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation
by using the TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
4
SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
(Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject atape when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
4
SCAN b : To scan the tape, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection on
the current side of the tape. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning. Your tape must have at
least three seconds of silence between each selection
for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the
player.
The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
0
The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-95
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3- 126.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. The radio will display READY and the
tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating the
feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
symbol is pressed.
3-96
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
DlSP or the eject symbol.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display. If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again toturn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
4
SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more then once, the player will
continue moving backward orforward through the CD.
4
SCAN b : To scan the disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the disc.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
(Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-97
Compact Disc Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Your vehicle may have an overhead Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System. If your vehicle has this
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened through your vehicles
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC
button until RSE appears on the radio display. The
current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will
come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother the disc should play.
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-98
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and the radio will display
RSE OFF. The radio will return to the last radio
source that you were listening to.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Base Radio Shown, Bos-
Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose@audio
system, your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified
speakers.
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
e
XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a
continental U.S. based satellite radio service that
offers 100 coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XMTMservice. For more
information, contact XMTMat www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-99
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
3-100
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
For XMTM (USA only,if your radio is equipped with
XMTMSatellite Radio Service), push this knob while in
XMTM modeto retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pushing and
releasing this knob, you may retrieve four different
categories of information: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY, Channel NumbedChannel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped
with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DABI, DAB2
(Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The
display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up
or tune down the range. The radio will display the
letter L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L
number refers to a frequency and there can be
multiple stations contained in one frequency. It may also
take a few seconds, once you have tuned to a
frequency, for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a
frequency, with every tune up or down, you may be
tuning to another station or to another frequency. The
display will show your selections.
k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-1 01
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FM1 and six FM2, six XMl and six XM2 (USA
only, if your radio is equipped with the XMTMSatellite
Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only,
if your radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2, or XM1,
XM2, or DABI, DAB2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-102
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose between bass, midrange and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock and classical program types.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Base@ audio
system, your equalization settings are either CUSTOM
or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will
adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will
produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the
display.
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS, XMTMand DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterick
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS
station will interrupt play if that selected program type
format is broadcast.
3-103
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
category by performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
3. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-104
INFO (information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio
Service.
Traffic interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD, or XMTM, or DAB station. Press the
TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the
display. When a traffic announcement comes on
the station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-105
XMTMRadio Messages
(after 4 second delay)
3-106
XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
I
I
I
Condition
No Info
Category Name not
available
No Info
No Texthformational
message available
No channel available for
the chosen category
Not Found
XM Locked
Theft lock active
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
Radio ID
label is needed to activate
Radio ID not known
I
I
3-107
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD A : Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact
disc player will hold up to six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play
automatically.
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3-108
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green you can load another disc. The disc player
takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more
than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of
the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to
play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds tothe CD you want to
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD A (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press
and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear
a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have
tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which
will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove
the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR
knob off and then on again. This will clear the
disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into
the player again.
<( REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
>>
FWD
(Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc
several times before stopping.
3-109
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of
the following:
To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM
ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to
turn it off.
To play the tracks on all of the discs that are
loaded in random order, press and release the RDM
button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn it off.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a compact disc. For more
information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed
previously in this section.
3-1 10
k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
press the button more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the disc.
k SCAN >I : To scan one disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
disc(s) is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one
disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the disc changer
is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track thatyou want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing
SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to
confirm that the track has been saved.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST
FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-1 11
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
Compact Disc Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
1. Turn the disc player on.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-1 12
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Listening to a DVD
Before You Drive
Your vehicle may have an overhead Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System. If your vehicle has this
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened through your vehicles
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX
button until RSE appears on the radio display. The
current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will
come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the CD AUX button, if a CD is loaded,
or press the BAND button to select a different source.
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers. The driver
cannot safely view the video screen while driving and
should not try to do so.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol will
go off of the radio display and the radio will display
RSE OFF. The radio will return to the last radio source
that you were listening to.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile
Disc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The
RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display
screen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
control.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console. The
DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control’’ later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP).
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for the
country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region
code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player will also play audio CDs. Home
recorded CDs (CD-R or CD-RW formats) will not play in
this DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-113
(Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu
(this button only operates with a DVD).
(Display Menu): Press this button to modify the video
screen display characteristics.
(Menu Navigation): Use the arrow
through a menu.
keys to navigate
(Enter): Press this button to select items within
a menu.
Playing a Disc
DVD Player Buttons
6 (Power):
Press this button to turn the RSE system
on or off.
A
(Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
(Stop): Press this button to stop the play of the
DVD player. Press this button twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
,/I1 (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to
toggle between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
3-1 14
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start, if
the vehicle ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or RAP.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the DVD player or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip
the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing
after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not
begin to play the main title, refer to the on-screen
instructions, as the DVD may be displaying its main
title menu.
Stopping and Resume Playback
DVD Messages
To stop a disc, press and release the stop button on the
DVD player or the remote control.To resume playback,
press the play/pause button on the DVD player or
the remote control. As long as the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,
the movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play
at the beginning.
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject
the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc within
25 to 30 seconds. The disc will then be stored in the
DVD player. The DVD player will not resume play of this
disc automatically.
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
able to be read or if the disc format is not
compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player can not play the disc. Severely
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.
3-1 15
Parental Control Button: This button is located on the
front of the DVD console, behind the video screen,
near the driver of the vehicle. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute
the audio. The video screen will display Parental Control
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player
will flash. It will also disable all other button operations
from the remote control and the DVD player (with
the exception of the eject button). The driver will then
be able to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of
the DVD player.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in either the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones and the infrared receiver
for the remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the infrared signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones and the remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.
Remote Control
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console. To
use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
3-116
Nofice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
damage may occur. Do not touchthe video screen.
See “Cleaning the Video Screen” in the Index
for more information.
To use the remote control, aim it at the infrared window
below the video screen and press the desired button.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the abilityof
the entertainment system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement’’ later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Remote Control Buttons
A. Power: Press this button to turn the DVD player on
or off.
B. Title: Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
C. Menu Navigation: Use the arrow keys to navigate
through a menu. The up arrow will skip to the next
chapter or track, the down arrow will take you to the
beginning of the current chapter or track. Press
the down arrow twice to take you to the previous
chapter or track. The right arrow will fast forward and
the left arrow will fast reverse through a chapter or
track.
D. Display Menu: Press this button to modify the video
screen display characteristics.
E. Audio: Press this button to call-up a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the
disc and is dependent of the disc.
F. Fast Reverse: Press this button to fast reverse the
DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this
button again. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
G. Source: Press this button to toggle between the
DVD player and an auxiliary source.
H. Stop: Press this button to stop the play of a DVD or
CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
I. Previous TracWChapter: Press this button to return
to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this
button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright or the previews.
J. Numeric Key Pad: The remote control numeric
keypad provides you with the capability of direct
chapter, title and track number selection.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, within 3 seconds of inputting
a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, to select chapter, title, and
track numbers greater then 9.
3-1 17
K. Illumination: Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on.
L. Menu: Press this button to access the DVD menu
(this button only operates with a DVD).
M. Enter: Press this button to select items within
a menu.
N. Return: Press this button to exit the current active
menu and return to the previous menu. This button
will operate only when a DVD is being played
and a menu is active.
0. Angle: Press this button to call-up a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the
disc and is dependent of the disc.
P. Subtitle: Press this button to call-up a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the
disc and is dependent of the disc.
Q. Fast Forward: Press this button to fast forward the
DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
R. Play/Pause: Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle
between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
S. Next TracWChapter: Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright or the previews.
3-118
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located 017
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Close the battery door securely.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless infrared
headphones.
Each set of headphones have an ON/OFF control. To
use the headphones activate the ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones. If
the light does not illuminate, the batteries may need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. To turn the headphones
OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
Each set of headphones has a rotary volume control. To
adjust the volume, adjust this control.
The headphones will automatically turn off if they lose
the infrared signal from the system after approximately
four minutes in order to preserve their battery power.
The signal may belost if the system is turned off or if the
headphones are out of range of the infrared signal
transmitters that are located below the video display
screen.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Tighten the screws to close the compartment door.
Notice; Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool place.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the front of the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
you to connect audio and video from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to your
RSE system just as you would to a standard television.
Standard RCA cables are needed to connect the
auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The yellow connector
inputs video and the red and white connectors input
right and left stereo audio. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper connection of your auxiliary
device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, you will need
to press the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote
control to change to the auxiliary mode. Pressing the
SRCE button will toggle the RSE system between
the auxiliary device and the BVD player.
3-1 19
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the navigation down arrow key to scroll down
to Video Format.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the navigation key to select the PAL video
format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
3-1 20
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the
radio if the RSE system power is on. Once the
RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio
you may adjust the speaker volume on the radio. If
the RSE system power is not on, the RSE system will
not be an available source on the radio. Refer to
the radio information for the radio that your vehicle has
for more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the Rear Seat Audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-722 for more information.
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into
the DVD player.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.The
parental control button
might have been pressed.
(The power indicator light
will flash.)
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the SRCE button
to toggle between the
DVD player and the
auxiliary source.The disc
is upside down or is not
compatible.
Press the Display
button on the DVD
player or on the remote
control. Change the
display mode.
Recommended Action
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.Change the Video
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the audio Press the Menu button on
or on the screen is wrong. the DVD player or on the
remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on the
DVD menu.
The remote control does
Point the remote control
not work.
directly at the infrared
window below the video
screen while using.Check
that the batteries are not
dead or put in wrong.The
parental control button
might have been pressed.
(The power indicator light
will flash.)
Problem
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
3-121
Recommended Action
Problem
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
the DVD starts where I
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
the beginning.
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Press the SRCE button to
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
change from the DVD
player mode to the
picture or sound.
auxiliary source
mode.Check to make sure
that the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
My disc is stuck in the
Press the Load/Eject
player. The Load/Eject
button on the DVD
player.Turn the power off,
button does not work.
then on again, then press
the Load/Eject button on
the DVD player.Do not
attempt to forcibly remove
the disc from the DVD
player. This could
permanently damage the
DVD player.
3-122
Recommended Action
Problem
This could be caused by
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out interference from cellular
telephone towers or by
or buzzes.
using your cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
See your dealer for
I lost the remote and/or
assistance.
the headphones.
Wipe the video screen
What is the best way to
with a soft cloth that is
clean the video screen?
1 damp with water.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the audio sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs,
DVDs, XM (if your vehicle is equipped with XMTM
Satellite Radio Service), or DAB (if your vehicle is
equipped with DAB) depending on your vehicles options.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control
the music sources that the front seat passengers are not
listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the
driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
each set of headphones. The front seat audio controls
always override the RSA controls.
Rear Seat Audio Controls
-
(Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume. The left knob controls the left headphone and
the right knob controls the right headphone.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, DVDs, XM (if your
vehicle is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service),
or DAB (if your vehicle is equipped with DAB)
depending on your vehicles options.
v SEEK A : While listening to AM, FM1 or FM2, XM1
or XM2, DAB1, or DAB2, press the up or the down
arrow to tune to the next or to the previous station and
stay there. If the front radio is in use, you cannot
seek through different stations.
RSA with HVAC Shown, RSA without HVAC Similar
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
(1)
(Power): Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is
equipped with the Base@ audio system. You may
operate the rear seat audio functions even when the
primary radio power is off.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. If
the cassette tape on the front radio is in use, you
cannot seek through different selections on a tape.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. If the CD player on the front radio
is in use, you cannot seek through different tracks.
3-123
PROG (Program): The front passengers must be
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:
Press this button to go to the preset radio stations
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing in the radio, press this button
to go back to the beginning of the CD.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If
the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
(OnStarNoice Recognition): If your vehicle has
OnStap, you can press this button to interact with
the Onstar@system. See the Onstar@manual provided
with your vehicle for more information.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@is armed.
IF your vehicle does not have Onstar@,pressing this
button will mute the audio system.
With THEFTLOCK@activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-124
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons
on the selected band. If a cassette tape is playing,
press this button to play the other side of the tape. If a
CD is playing, press this button to go to the next
available CD.
A
v
SOURCE
: Press this button to select AM, FM1 ,
FM2, or XMI or XM2, (if your vehicle is equipped
with the XMTM Satellite Radio Service), or DAB1 or
DAB2 (if your vehicle is equipped with DAB), or a
cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loaded
to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the
display as a tape or a CD symbol.
A SEEK 7: Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there.
A
V O L v : Press the up or the down arrow to increase
or to decrease volume.
DVD Distortion
You may experience audio distortion in the
IR headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*,
two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the Onstar@System.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-1 25
XMTMSatellite Radio Service
XMTMSatellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with Satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
“NO SIGNAL” to indicate interference.
DAB Radio
DAB gives you digital radio reception. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with radio signals,
causing the sound to come and go. Your radio
may display “NO SIGNAL” to indicate interference.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
3-126
but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as
a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer‘s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut
tape detection feature is active again.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassettewith a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This typeof cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly asthe scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display--- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wearand the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
3-127
Fixed Mast Antenna
DAB Radio Antenna System
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Your DAB antenna is located on the roof of your
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build
up for clear radio reception.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten by hand,
then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna
System
Your XMTMSatellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XMTM system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XMTMsystem. Make
sure that the XMTMsatellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-128
If your vehicle is purchased in Canada and driven into
the United States the DAB radio antenna system will not
function. DAB radio reception is availablein Canada only.
The performance of your DAB system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your DAB system. Make sure
that the DAB antenna is not obstructed.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power
off. The chime volume
level will change fromthe normal level to loud, and LOUD
will be displayed on the radio. To change back to the
default or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6
again. The chimelevel will change from theloud level to
normal, and NORMALwill be displayed. Each time the
chime volumeis changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
will disable vehicle chimes.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4-2
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-6
Braking .........................................................
4-6
Traction Assist System (TAS) ........................... 4-9
Locking Rear Axle ........................................ 4-11
Stabilitrak@ System ....................................... 4-11
Steering ...................................................... 4-14
QUADRASTEERTM ....................................... 4-16
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-19
Passing ....................................................... 4-19
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-21
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle .................................................... 4-22
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-36
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
..................4-38
City Driving ..................................................
Freeway Driving ...........................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................
Highway Hypnosis ........................................
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................
Winter Driving ..............................................
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..........................................
Towing ..........................................................
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................
Level Control ...............................................
AutorideTM ..................................................
Trailer Recommendations ...............................
Towing a Trailer ...........................................
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-44
4-46
4-50
4-53
4-53
4-53
4-56
4-57
4-58
4-59
4-59
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-22.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet theyare common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both
city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle
in
front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 mi) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 mi of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chanceof being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enoughto avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.
3 and then driving
-.‘y dangerous.
Dr
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious-or
even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
........
._.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering
and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their
work atthe places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Assist System
(TAS) on page 4-9.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-42.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there’s a DRP problem,
both the Brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computeris
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let's say the road is wet and you're driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here's what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Traction Assist System (TAS)
Using Anti-Lock
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the rear wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power to limit
wheel spin.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but
this is normal.
The traction control system is enabled every time your
vehicle is started. The system will activate if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction.
Braking in Emergencies
You may hear or feel the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you
may notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal
and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
4-9
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under Turn SignaVMultifunction
Lever on page 3-7.
-
When the traction off light
is on, the TAS is off and
will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
The traction off light will come on under the following
conditions:
The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
4-10
The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service.
If the vehicle has been driven with the TAS system
on for long periods of time, or if the vehicle has
gone through many several high speed braking
maneuvers the system may be automatically
disabled. The system will automatically re-enable
after approximately two minutes of not using
the brakes.
See Traction Off Light on page 3-43.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need
to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle’’ under If You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-50.
To turn the system on or
off, press the TAS on/off
button located on the
instrument panel.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS
is set to come on automatically or not, you can always
turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off
button.
Locking Rear Axle
If you used the button to turn the system off, the traction
off light will come on and stay on. You can turn the
system back on at any timeby pressing the button
again. The traction off light should go off.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come on
automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the
transmission in PARK (P).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.
3. Apply the brake pedal, press the accelerator
pedal to the floor and thenpress the TAS on/off
button and hold it down for at least six seconds.
4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Stabilitrak@' System
Your vehicle is equipped with the Stabilitrak@which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 m.p.h.
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
4-1 1
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking during the first two miles after
starting your vehicle, the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message may appear. If this is the case, your
vehicle does not need servicing. Turn your vehicle off
and back on again to reset the system. If either message
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
your vehicle hasn’t gone through hard acceleration
or braking in the first two miles, your vehicle should be
taken in for service.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. You may also feel or
hear the system working; this is normal. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
The Stabilitrak@mode
button is located on the
instrument panel.
Stabilitrak@and part of the traction control system can
be turned off or back on by pressing the
Stabilitrak@button. All-wheel drive vehicles must be in
all-wheel drive mode to turn the system on or off.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light will
illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when Stabilitrak@is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
When the Stabilitrak@ system has beenturned off you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If You Are
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-50.
When the transfer case is in 4 low, the stability system
is automatically disabled, and the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message will appear on the DIC. In 4 low,
the Stabilitrak@button only turns the traction control
system on and off.
4-12
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
Stabilitrak@ system.Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off Stabilitrak@, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled. In
this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control to activate
constantly. For more information on the traction active
message, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-52.
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If
you do, the traction off light will flash to indicate
that you may be causing damage to your transfer
case. This could lead to costly repairs not covered
by your warranty.You should immediately reduce
engine power until the tractionoff light stops
flashing.
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically
disabled. The system will come back on after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or
longer depending on brake usage.
Notice: Don’t allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively when the traction off, ABS and brake
lights are on and the
SERVICE STABILITY MESSAGE
is displayed. In this situation, the system may not
be able to flash the traction
off light to warn the
driver of possible damage to the transfer
case. This
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. You should immediately reduce engine
power until the lights and messages are no longer
displayed.
4-13
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-7
Stabilitrak@may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems steering and acceleration - have to do their work where
the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose
control. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
4-14
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, youcome over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
QUADRASTEERTM
The QUADRASTEERTM System has a control and
diagnostic module that monitors and records current
system status and operational information.
:
4
3
II
If your vehicle is equipped with the 4 Wheel Steer
system it has the ability to steer the vehicle with all four
wheels
Once the 4 Wheel Steer mode is selected, it is
recommended to leave the vehicle in this mode at all
times, and during all driving and weather conditions.
You can select this mode at any speed, however, if you
are turning the system will not engage until the turn
is complete.
The 4 Wheel Steer system is equipped with three
different driving modes:
Two wheel steering (2)
Fourwheel steering (4)
Four wheel steering with a trailer mode
4-1 6
(q
)
The switch is located on the instrument panel.
2: In this mode the vehicle will operate like any other
vehicle with two wheel steering. If you want to use
2 wheel steer mode and your vehicle is not in this mode,
press the button until the 2 indicator, located to the
right of the 4 Wheel Steer button, lights up. If the
2 indicator is flashing you will haveto center the steering
wheel by turning it to the left or right.
Your vehicle will return to 2 when the transmission is
shifted into NEUTRAL, for example when entering a
car wash.
If you want to use tire chains, the vehicle needs to be in
2 wheel steer mode.
4: In this mode all four wheels will help steer the
vehicle. If you want to use 4, and your vehicle is not in
this mode, press the button, until the 4 indicator,
located to the right of the 4 Wheel Steer button, comes
on and stays on. If the 4 indicator is flashing you will
have to center the steering wheel by turning it to the left
or right.
L
Higher Speeds (40 m.p.h./64 km/h, and above)
At higher speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
the same direction. This improves stability of the vehicle
during lane changes and sweeping turns.
(4 Wheel Steer tow mode): When towing a
trailer the 4 wheel steer tow mode provides enhanced
stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the
tow vehicle more closely, especially during lane
changes.
Slower Speeds (below 40 m.p.h./ 64 km/h )
At slower speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
opposite directions. This helps the vehicle make
tighter turns, such as during parking, cornering and
turning into tight spaces.
In this mode the system operates much like the 4 mode,
but is enhanced for trailer towing. It is recommended
for all types and weights of trailers.
4-17
To engage the 4 Wheel Steer tow mode, press the
button until the 4 and tow mode indicators light up on
the instrument panel. If the tow indicator is flashing you
will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to
the left or right. While in the 4 wheel steer tow mode, it
is possible the steering wheel may be slightly off
center. For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-59.
B-
Car Washes for QUADRASTEERTM
Equipped Vehicles
Notice: Because your vehicle has a wider rear
track a small number of older car washes may be
too narrow for your vehicle. Conveyor systems
on some automatic car washes may damage your
vehicle. Only use conveyor system car washes with
13-inch (33 cm) wide conveyor rails and/or
stationary washes withat least 82 inches (208 cm)
between the rails. Before using the car wash
check with the manager.
4-18
13 in.
13 in.
--
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
0
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-19
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-20
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that if your right outside mirror is
convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Assist System, remember: It
helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have
this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-2 1
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-6. If your vehicle
doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive
off-road unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked.
Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide.
You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will
help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can easily remove
the front bumper lower air dam.
4-22
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push-pins located around the lower edge of the
front bumper. The push-pins are accessible from
underneath the front bumper.
The following steps must be performed on each of the
push-pins to removethe air dam:
1. Insert a tool into the
push-pin slot and pull
downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.
3. Pull the push-pins and
lower air dam assembly
away from the
retainers until the lower
air dam is free.
When you’re back on roads, though, be sure to replace
the air dam.
2. While continuing to pull
downward on the
push-pin, squeeze and
turn the expandable
end of the push-pin
with a tool until it
releases from the
retainer.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front bumper lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flowto the engine
and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the frontof your vehicle to be damaged. Always
be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when
you’re finished off-road driving.
-\
4-23
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
/,
Before You Go Off-Roading
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended
retainer and push the
washer portion of
the push-pin towards
the retainer until it locks
into place.
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the
local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be
driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
2. Push the flat end of the
push-pin towards the
retainer until it
locks into place,
making sure each is
secure.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
4-24
Environmental Concerns
0
0
Cargo I theloadfloorpiled
I
r tt I
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop.You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the topof the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargoarea, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far
forward and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-56 and Tires
on page 5-6 I .
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
8
0
,
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment - shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses
- or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
Always carry a litter bag - make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
e
Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
0
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-25
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know
how to use it properly.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
you have less time to react.
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-26
., ...
W..,.. ;ou
dr ng off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear?
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
@
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can’t control
the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious - or even fatal - accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-27
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes youup,downor across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgmentmay
and an understanding ofwhatyour vehicle can and can’t
do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
incline with only
a
small change in elevation
where
you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline maygetsteeper as younearthetop,butyou
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden
by bushes, grass or
Here are some
other
a hill.
0
any h...; are sirr , y too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, don’t
drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
things to consider as you
approach
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
0
0
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you
need, because you don’t want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you’re there.
Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
Dri
the to,- ,crest) of a hi1 t f l speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the topof a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
~
1 ning or driving across steep 1 s canbe
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
~
~
~~
~
i
i
4-29
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is
about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
0
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels
are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s
best that you back down the hill with your
wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or
right will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could
go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t
make it up the hill, you must back straight down
the hill.
4-30
Q: Suppose, after stalling,
I try to back down the
hill and decideI just can’t do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your
transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leavethe vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
0
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
-ng the tr_---sfer
case to LJTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer caseto NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or
4 Low position.
4-31
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping yo1.- ..-’We under control at all times.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steepto drive
across. You could roll over if you don’t drive
straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
0: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
4-32
if it
happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
0
Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
0
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut,
etc.) and roll over.
0
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt
even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
-
re
1 It’s too steep will
Drivi across an inc
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t
drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
”walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-33
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Getting out on the downhill (WN)side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t
get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,turning
is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’rein mud - the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle movingso you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the
air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on
sand. This will improve traction. Drive at a reduced
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4-34
Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On
wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
Amm
oft control.
Driving on frozenlakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deepthe water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles
or exhaust pipe, don’t try it - you probably won’t
get through. Also, water that deepcan damage your
axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer
to stop.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it’s only shallow water,it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing
water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-38 for
more information on driving through water.
4-35
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-36
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim
light - and aren’t even aware of it.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-37
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
*!!
4-38
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
T y won’t
Wet b kes can cause accints.
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-39
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
FIOL,,~or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carriedaway. As little as six inchesof
flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standingwater,
drive through them very slowly.
4-40
7
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Turn on your low-beam headlamps- not just your
parking lamps -to help make you more visibleto
others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and beprepared to have your viewrestricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-6I.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-42.
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
4-41
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-42
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
e
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
e
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
e
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
e
Weather Forecasts: What’sthe weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
e
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-43
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
e
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-44
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-22 for information aboutdriving off-road.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the workof slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehiclein
gear when you go downhill.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shiftto a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
e
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
e
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
e
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
4-45
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a failing rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.
4-46
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on
a slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-50.Even though your vehicle has a traction
system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. See Traction Assist System
(TAS) on page 4-9.
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
4-47
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
e
4-48
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under ! J r
vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon
monoxide) gas t o get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you.You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that
is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-49
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If you ~- 1 your tires spin at I..,..
;pe--, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other partsof
the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or otherdamage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheelsas little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above25 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
4-50
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drivevehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. If
your vehicle has the Traction Assist System, you should
turn it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. If your
vehicle has the Stabilitrak@ System,turn the
Stabilitrak@ Systemoff by pressing the
Stabilitrak@button so that the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED and TRACTION OFF lights are illuminated
on the instrument panel cluster. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheelsin theforward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn't get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you
can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-53.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if you're stuck off-road and need
to be pulled to some place where you can continue
driving.
4-51
'
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight
out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-52
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (suchas behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and ”dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
e
What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
e
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
e
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
e
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-43.
Dinghy Towing
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to LOCK.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles, should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal ltibrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
4-53
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your
vehicle.
"1
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the following
vehicle.
n
6.
- .-- the i{
ion 9
.
I
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
4-54
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Dolly Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive, vehicles, should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. to properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the following
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition off.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak@it is not
designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your
vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
I
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
I
4-55
Loading Your Vehicle
\
GAWR FRT
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
The Certificationflire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
GAWR RR
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
;EE ~ N E R ’ MANUAL
S
FOR ADDITIONAL
\
INFORMATION^
I
1
10 noi bad your ve---;le an,
vie-..lanthe
GVWR, or either the maximum tront or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
~
The Certificationflire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle
Document in the cab.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle,-all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certificationnire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
4-56
Notice: Yourwarrantydoesnotcoverpartsor
components that fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
Using heavier suspension components to getadded
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your driving in this manual. See ”Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else - they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a --7sh, they’ll keep going.
Level Control
Self-Adjusting
The self-adjusting rear suspension is available on
C/K 1500 vehicles and is available with the premium
smooth ride suspension package.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. In a
trunk, put themas far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them
are above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
This type of level control will provide a leveled riding
position as well as improved handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions. A hydraulic pump
inside each rear shock absorber raises the rear of
the vehicle to the proper height, based on inputs from
the road surface, while the vehicle is being driven.
It takes approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) of driving for the
leveling to complete, depending on the road surface
conditions.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately
twelve hours, the leveling system may bleed down to a
lower height. This can be especially apparent if a
trailer is left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods
of time. The vehicle must be driven to re-level the
vehicle.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, the vehicle
should be driven approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) with the
trailer prior to adjusting (leveling) the hitch.
4-57
Automatic Level Control
AutorideTM
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the
AutorideTM suspension.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
The AutorideTMfeature will provide a superior vehicle
ride and handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, IiWdive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
4-58
AutorideTMalso interacts with the tow/haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See Tow/Hau/ Mode Light on
page 3-50 for more information.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is
the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry.
It doesn’t included the weight of the people inside.
But you can figure about 150 Ibs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributinghitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-59
Towing a Trailer.
Towirl a Trailer
If you don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
--
Nofice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance
is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer.
See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section.
4-59
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
e
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh less than 5,000 Ibs. (2 270 kg). You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will
weigh more than 5,000 Ibs. (2 270 kg). You can ask
a hitch dealer about sway controls.
4-60
e
Don’t tow a trailer atall during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
e
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
e
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
this section.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
tow/haul mode is to:
0
Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of
the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR!
See Weight of the Trailer later in this section.
Tow/haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
0
Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a button at the end
of the shift lever which, when pressed, enables
tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with
AutorideTM which further improves your vehicle’s ride
while towing. See AutoriderM on page 4-58 for more
information. When the button is pressed, a light on the
instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that
tow/haul has been selected. Tow/haul may be turned off
by pressing the button again, at which time the
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The
vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every time
it is started.
@
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
0
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
4-61
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargoin the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
I Vehicle*
I Axle
Ratio
I Maximum
Trailer
Weight
I GCWR
I C-1500 (2WD)*
I
1
4800 V8
5,700 Ibs. (2 585 kg)
(3 039 kg)
11,000 Ibs. (4 994 kg)
12,000 Ibs. (5 448 kg) 6,700 Ibs.
5300 V8
6,700 Ibs. (3 039 kg)
7,700 Ibs. (3 492 kg)
12,000 Ibs. (5 448 kg)
13,000 Ibs. (5 902 kg)
kg) (3 356
8,400 Ibs. (3
kg)
810
13,000 Ibs. (5 902 kg)
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
00 V8 5300
(SuburbanNukon XL)
I Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs
4-62
(454 kg).
Axle Ratio Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Vehicle"
K-1500
I GCWR
(4 WD)*
4800 V8
5300 V8
Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg).
I Vehicle*
I C-2500
1
I Axle
Ratio
I GCWR
(2WD)*
6000 V8
(SuburbanNukon XL)t
6000 V8 wI4WS
I 8100 V8
I Maximum
Trailer
Weight
8,200 Ibs. (3 722 kg)
10,200 Ibs. (4 630 kg)
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
16,000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)**
7,600 Ibs. (3447 kg)
9,600 Ibs. (4354 kg)
14,000 Ibs. (6 350 kg)
16, 000 Ibs (7 257 kg)
I
3.73
I 10,400 Ibs. (4 717 kg)
I 17,000
Ibs.
I (Suburban/YukonXL)t I
4.10
I 12,000
Ibs.
I 14,000
Ibs.
356
(6
(5 448 kg)
(7 718
kg)
kg)
*Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 Ibs. (681 kg) maximum.
**GCWR limited to 14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg) on vehicles with 283 suspension.
t2500 SuburbanNukon XL (ZWD) equipped with 283 base suspension limited to 7,900 Ibs. (3 583 kg) trailer
4-63
Vehicle*
K-2500 (4WD\*
6000 V8
(SuburbanNukon XL)t
I Ratio
Axle
I Maximum
Trailer
Weight
I GCWR
3.73
7,600 Ibs. (3 447
kg)
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
4.1 0
9,600 Ibs. (4 354kg)
16,000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)**
3.73
7,300
Ibs. (3 31
1
kg)
14,000 Ibs. (6 350 kg)
6,000 V8 w/4WS
9,300 Ibs. (4 218kg)
4.10
16, 000 Ibs (7 257 kg)
3.73
10,100 Ibs. (4 581 kg)
17,000 Ibs. (7 718 kg)
8100 V8
4.10
12,000 Ibs. (5 448
kg)
19,000 Ibs. (8 626 kg)
*Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 Ibs. (681 kg)
**GCWR limited to 14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg) on vehicles with 283 suspension.
t2500 SuburbanNukon XL (4WD) equipped with 283 base suspension limited to 7,900 Ibs. (3 586 ka) trailer
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
4-64
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
A
E3
If you’re using a weight-carrying or aweight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight(A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Tire Loading for more information. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use a
weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t go
over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight
distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 Ibs (2 270 kg) be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
4-65
Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-40 Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach safety chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 Ibs (2 270 kg) with
a factory-installed step bumper, you may attach the
safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper. If
you are towing a trailer up to your vehicle’s trailer rating
limit, you may attach the safety chains to the attaching
point on the hitch platform. If you are towing with
an aftermarket hitch, following the trailer or hitch
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chain. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
4-66
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak@, your trailer
cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
a Trailer
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the comfort control setting for maximum
air because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-67
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel steering and
if you use it while backing your trailer the same rules
apply. However, with four-wheel steering your rig
will respond more quickly and it may take additional
practice to get used to backing up with four-wheel
steering.
4-68
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. it’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See "Tow/Haul Mode"
for more information.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-30.
Parf-3g on '"11s
You really shouldnoarkyour
vehic , w I a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here's
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don't shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
4-69
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
It can be dan,-roL__ =-- OL- >f your c _..._.
e
if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle
can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmlyset.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P).So, be
sure the transfer caseis in a drive
gear -- not in
NEUTRAL.
4-70
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Basic Trailer Wiring
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer.
4-71
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Trailer Wiring Harness Package
Yellow:Left Stop/Turn Signal
DarkGreen: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White:Ground
LightGreen:Back-upLamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
4-72
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
@
Yellow:Left Stopflurn Signal
DarkGreen:Right Stopnurn Signal
@
@
@
0
Brown: Taillamps
White:Ground
LightGreen:Back-upLamps
Red: BatteryFeed
DarkBlue: Trailer Brake
If your trailer is equipped with electronic brakes, you
can get a jumper harness (electric trailer brake control)
with a trailer battery feed fuse from your dealer. This
harness and fuse should be installed by your dealer or a
qualified service center.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
Step-Bumper Pad
Your vehicle has a rear step bumper with a rear step
pad at the center of the bumper.
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
and your step-bumper has
three cutout circles you
must push out the center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball.
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, you can also get an
adapter.
If your step-bumper has only one cutout circle, you will
have to cut out the circle, then remove it to install
the trailer ball.
4-73
.PZX
4-74
NOTES
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................
5.3
Doing Your Own Sewice Work ......................... 5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ...................................................... 5.4
Fuel ................................................................ 5.5
Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5.5
Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5-6
California Fuel ............................................... 5.6
Additives ....................................................... 5-6
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) ................................. 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5-8
Filling Your Tank ............................................ 5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-11
Checking Things Under
the Hood ............................................... -5-12
Hood Release .............................................. 5.12
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5.14
Engine Oil ................................................... 5-17
Engine Air CleanedFilter ................................ 5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid ......................... 5-25
Engine Coolant ............................................. 5.27
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-30
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5-30
Cooling System ............................................ 5-33
Engine Fan Noise ......................................... 5-38
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5-39
Brakes ........................................................ 5-40
Battery ....................................................... -5-44
Jump Starting ............................................... 5-45
All-Wheel Drive .............................................. 5.50
Rear Axle ....................................................... 5.51
Four-wheel Drive ............................................ 5.52
Front Axle ......................................................
5.53
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5.54
Halogen Bulbs .............................................. 5.54
Headlamps .................................................. 5.54
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ......................................... 5-55
Side Identification Marker Lamps ..................... 5.56
Roof Marker Lamps ...................................... 5.56
Taillamps ..................................................... 5.58
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5.59
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5.60
Ti res..............................................................
5.6 1
Inflation ..Tire Pressure ................................ 5.62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5.62
When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-64
Buying New Tires ......................................... 5.64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5.65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement .................................. 5.67
Tire Chains .................................................. 5.68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-69
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-70
Spare Tire ................................................... 5-87
Appearance Care ............................................ 5.88
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................. 5-88
Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5.91
Weatherstrips ............................................... 5.91
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-91
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-93
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-93
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5-93
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5.94
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ........... 5-94
5-2
5-96
Vehicle Identification .....................................
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-96
Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5-96
Electrical System ............................................ 5-97
Add-on Electrical Equipment .......................... 5.97
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5.97
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-97
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5-97
Capacities and Specifications ........................ 5-106
Capacities and Specifications ........................ 5-106
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-109
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-109
Service
We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you'll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You'll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-I I.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-18.
You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attemptany vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts canlater
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-96.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);
also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-7. In all
other engines, including the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use
only regular unleaded gasoline.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Additives
~~
Canada Only
5-6
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage theplastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle ldenfificafion Number
(VIN) on page 5-96.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);
also see Fuel on page 5-5. In all other engines, including
the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleaded
gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine
(VIN Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E-85).
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E-85) pump available. The U. S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels website
(http://afdcmap.nrel.gov/nreI/) that can help you find
E-85 fuel. Those stations that do have E-85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel
if the ethanol content is greafer than 85%. Your vehicle
may not operate properly if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
5-7
At a minimum, E-85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798.
To insure quick starts in the wintertime, the E-85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E-85, it may be because your E-85 fuel is
not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel
tank may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed to
accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E-85 fuel.
for good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (OOC),
the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more
than 70% ethanol.
E-85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you’ll
need to refill your fuel tank more often when using
E-85 than when you’re using gasoline. Regular unleaded
gasoline is recommended when pulling a trailer. For
payload capacity with ethanol fuel, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-56.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E-85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage
caused by additives wouldn’t be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. Don’t use additives with
E-85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does businessin the
country where you’ll be driving.
5-8
Filling Your Tank
Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-9
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hotweather.
Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
5-10
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-91.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly
installed. this would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction lndicator Lamp on
page 3-46.
Notice; If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction lndicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Fi”’ng a PC . ‘)le Fu
~
’
C - nt- ‘ner
Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the fillingis complete.
0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-1 1
Checking Things Under
the Hood
Things that burn can get on hot engine . rts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle inside
the vehicle located
under and to the left of
the steering wheel.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are
on properly. Pull down the hood and close it
firmly.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grill.
5-13
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC 5300 V8 engine (VORTEC 4800 and 6000 V8 engines similar), you'll see
the following:
I
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped)
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
F.Engine Oil Fill
G. Fan
H. Remote Negative (-j Terminal (GND)
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
L. Underhood Fuse Block
M. Battery
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
5-15
When you open the hood on the VORTEC 8100 V8 engine you’ll see the following:
5-16
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped)
D.Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
F. Engine Oil Fill
G.Fan
H. Remote Negative (-) Terminal (GND)
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
K. Brake Master Fluid Reservoir
L.UnderhoodFuseBlock
M. Battery
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under
DiC Warnings and Messages on page 3-62.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-17
Checking Engine Oil
It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow ring handle and is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger's side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-74for more
information on location.
8.1 L Engine
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don't, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
~
5-18
All Other Engines
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5- 106.
The engine oil fill cap for
the VORTEC 4800, 5300,
6000 and 8100 V8
engine is located on the
engine valve cover, on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Your vehicle may have a cap with text and a graphic, or
just a graphic as shown. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
5-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
HOT
WEATHER
7
If youchoose
I
to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
L
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
VISCOSITY GRADEOIL NOT RECOMMENDED
5-20
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for yourvehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE IOW-40 or SAE 2OW-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil
Life SystemTM)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. It is also important to
check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-21
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Message
The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you can change your oil prior to
a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,
reset the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes for five
seconds, the system is reset.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air CleanedFilter
The air cleaner/filter assembly has an indicator, if
equipped, that lets you know when the engine air
cleanedfilter is dirty and needs to be serviced. The air
cleaner/filter indicator is located on the air cleaner cover.
See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-14 for
more information on location.
5-22
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page6-IO
to determine when to check the indicator.
The service window A with
the percentage scale
shows the amount
of engine air cleanedfilter
life used. When both
service window A and
service window B
turn orange, replace the
engine air cleaner/filter.
After changing the air filter, press the top button on the
indicator to reset it.
The air cleanedfilter assembly is located on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-74 for more information on location.
5-23
4. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See Part B:
To replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the following:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.The
air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops
flame if the engine backfires.If it isn’t there
and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off.
1. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
2. Remove the air cleanedfilter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing.
5-24
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging enginefire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which willdamage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when
you’re driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall onhot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
0
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under any ofthese conditions,
change the fluid and filter every 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-25
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(IOOC). If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (IOOC) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-26
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The red transmission
dipstick handle with the
graphic is located at
the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot
check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Nofice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@111, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@
111 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under How to Check.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL@ extendedlife coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-30.
5-27
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F ( -37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
-- at 30,000 miles
coolant will require change sooner
(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
5-28
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t getthe overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper
coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compantment Overview on
page 5-74 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
If the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and
stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-62.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiatorare hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out and
burn you badly. Never turn the surge tank
pressure cap - even a little - when the
engine and radiator are hot.
Youcanbe
burnec
youspill coa
In hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-29
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
See Engine Comparfment
Overview on page5-14 for
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-44. In addition, you will
find a LOW COOLANT LEVEL, ENGINE OVERHEATED
and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in the
DIC on the instrument panel. See Driver information
Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only)
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.
Notice: Your pressure cap is a pressure-type cap
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolantloss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
See “Capacities and Specifications” for more
information.
5-30
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operatingmode, to avoid engine
damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting
any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repairthe
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oi
life system.See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
eryone away fro the
venlcle
cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of s ~ e a m o r
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engineis
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
I
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay
away from the engineif you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION:
Notice; If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would notbe
covered by your warranty.See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for
information on driving to a safe placein an
emergency.
(Continued)
5-31
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant
under DlC Warnings and Messages on page 3-62.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-59.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try
this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in neutral while
stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road. Shift
to park or neutral and let the engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-32
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get sewice
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
All Other Engines
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
8100 V8 Engines
C. EngineFan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-33
P-
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Heater and radiato. .ioses, and --.ier engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if thereis a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-34
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL@is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
- at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL@ coolant atthe coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more
information.
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
COOK
I
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap-- even a little they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
--
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-35
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX COOL@coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine partsare hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hotengine.
L
1. Park the vehicle on a
level surface. You can
remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot.
2. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left)
about one full turn. if you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
3. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-36
4. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
5. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-37
6. Then replace the
pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is
hand-tight and
fully seated.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
5-38
8100 Engines
Windshield Washer Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Comparfment Overview
on page 5-14 for reservoir location.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-74 for reservoir
location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
5-39
Adding Washer Fluid
7
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full.
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system.Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank ifit is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
5-40
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
If you have too much brake fluid,it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See "Checking Brake Fluid"
in this section.
I
,.f
. ..
. .. ,,:;.%
+.L't~"x.za
i
I _ "
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Parf C: Periodic
Maintenance inspections on page 6-14.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn't have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-4 1
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6- 16.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluidin your brake
system, your brakes may not workwell, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
5-42
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If
you do, wash it off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System lnspection on page 6- 15.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes won’t work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-43
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system - for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If
you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The
braking performance you’ve come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco@ battery. Whenit’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-14 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-44
Batl... ies have acid that can d r n you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-124.
Jump Starting
If your battery (or batteries) has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to followthe steps below
to do it safely.
Batteries can hurt you.They can be dangerous
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
They contain enough electricity to
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking
brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in
NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that aren’t needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
5-45
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive
bracket. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket on all V8 and diesel
engines, and on the thermostat housing on the
8.1 L engine. On V8 engines it is marked ”GND.”
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5- 14
for more information on location.
-
l g amat
near abatterycan causc attery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You
don’t need to addwater to the ACDelco@
battery installed in your new vehicle. But aif
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take careof that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-46
Fans or otl ’ moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative(-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connectthe
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7 . Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
5-47
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) cable. Use
a remote negative (-)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
9. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal part, or to the remote negative (-)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Connect the other end
of the negative(-)
cable to the
negative (-) terminal of
the dead battery or to a
remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Nofice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each otheror any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-48
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (-) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-49
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-14.
How to Check Lubricant
Automatic Transfer Case (A) Fill Plug (B) Drain Plug
5-50
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to
1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of
the filler plug hole. The proper level for the 2500 Series
is from 0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole. The proper level for the 1500
and 2500 series vehicles with QUADRASTEERTM
(4 Wheel Steer) is from 0 to 1/4 inch (0 to 6 mm) below
the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
1500 Series shown, 2500 similar
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-51
Four-wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-14.
How to Check Lubricant
~~
Automatic Transfer Case
5-52
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page6-16.
Front Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Pad D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
5-53
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
See Replacement Bulbs on page5-59 for the proper
types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulbs
nalogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-54
1. Your vehicle is equipped with two pins, remove the
two pins on the top of the headlamp assembly. To
remove the pins, turn the outer pin outward and
pull it straight up. To remove the inner pin, turn it in
and pull it straight up.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Low-BeamHeadlamp
B. High-BeamHeadlamp
2. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
5. Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers or hands.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install and tighten the two pins.
A.
B.
C.
D.
SidemarkerLamp
Retainer Clip
Front Turn Signal Lamp
DaytimeRunningLamp
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as mentioned
previously.
2. Press the retainer clip, located behind the turn
signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.
5-55
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal
housing.
4. Unplug the lamp assembly harness from the
housing.
5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care not
to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.
7. Reinstall the lamp housing.
7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
Roof Marker Lamps
8. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle
placing the hook and posts on the inner side into
the alignment holes first and then the outer side into
the retainer bracket. Push until you hear a click.
9. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Side Identification Marker Lamps
1. To expose the service slot, locate the lamp gasket
near the rear wheel, and pull back the edge.
2. Using a flat tool, push into the slot to release the
lamp housing.
3. Pull the housing out to expose the wiring harness
and connector.
5-56
5. Unplug the lamp.
1. Remove the two
screws and lift off
the lens.
4. Put a new bulb into the
socket and turn
clockwise until it locks
in place.
I
2. Remove the six screws on the center roof marker
lamps.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
5-57
Taillamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
6. Back-upLamp
C. Stoplamp
I
5. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
5-58
1. Use a tool to remove
the two screws from
the lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
2. Remove the lamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwiseto remove it from the taillamp
housing.
4. Pull the old bulb
straight out from the
socket.
Lamp
-Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
9006 Low-Beam Headl
9005
4157K
194
3457A
3157
High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL
Front Roof Marker Lamp
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
Rear
Marker
Lamp,
Taillamp and
Stop
I Rear13157
Turn Lamp
1 Back-up Lamp
13157
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
I
I
I
I
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp housing and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly
5-59
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See At Least Twice
a Year on page 6-10 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 5- 109.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps
5-60
1 and 2.
Ti res
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warrantyand where to obtain service,
see your warranty booklet for details.
Poorly maintained and imp1 berly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
atedtirespose I samedanger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-61
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
When to Check
The Certificationrrire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Check your tires once a month or more.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too muchflexing
0
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Too muchheat
Tire overloading
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Bad wear
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Bad handling
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-67 for more information.
Bad fueleconomy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
0
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-62
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchevwheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals-
Rust or dirt on awheel, or on theb-.Zs to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
CertificationRire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPC
Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get
new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number.
That way your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give proper endurance, handling,
speed rating, traction, ride and other things during
normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damageto your vehicle.
Be sure to use thesame size and type tires on
all wheels. If your vehicle has 17 inch road
tires (those originally installed on your vehicle)
it is all right to drive with the
16 inch spare tire
that came with your vehicle. When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with the same overall diameter as
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels. Because
this spare tire was developed for useon your
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling or
cause damage to your vehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
5-65
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (15 ) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-66
Temperature - A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for thistire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancea
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
U l g thew
1g replacementwheels,wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control.You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
5-67
Used Replacement Wheels
Putl,.,g a used wheel on your vehic,, is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
IT your
vehicle has r265/75R16, LT265/75R16,
P265ROR16, or P265/7OR17 size tires, don’t use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enoughclearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can causedamage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.The
area damaged bythe tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
5-68
Notice: If you have a tire size other than
P265D5R16, LT265D5R16, P265DQR16,or
P265DQR17use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the rear tires
only.
Don’t use chains on the front tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
Cha -ing a -..2 can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
Put the wheel blocks
at the front andrear
of the tire farthest
away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side of the vehicle,
at the
opposite end.
5-70
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
/
A
B
C
TahoeNukon Models (Rear Access Panel)
SuburbanNukon XL Models
A. Tool Kit with
Jack Tools
B. Bracket and Wing Nut
C. Wheel Block Wing Nut
D. Tire Blocks
E. Jack
A. Bottle Jack
B.Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
D.Mounting Bracket
E. RemovableTray
F. Retaining Hook
G. Retaining Bracket and
Wing Nut
H. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
The equipment you'll need is under the storage tray in
the left trim panel for SuburbanNukon XL models.
5-71
For TahoeNukon models, the equipment is located
behind the left trim panel in the rear of the vehicle. Skip
the first step and follow the last three.
You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
1 . Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. There is a wing nut used to retain the tool kit. To
remove it, turn the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from its holder, turn the
knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head.
4. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can
be removed by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem, Pointed
Down
F. Spare Tire
5-72
G. TireRetainer
H.HoistCable
I. Hoist Lock (If
Equipped)
J. Hoist Shaft Access
Hole
K. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock, open the
spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the
ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack
handle extensions as shown. Insert the hoist
end (open end) of the extension through the hole in
the rear bumper. Be sure the hoist end of the
extension connects into the hoist shaft (the ribbed
square end of the extension is used to lower
the spare tire).
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle. The wheel wrench has a
hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards
you, to assist in reaching the spare tire.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See ‘Secondary Latch System” next.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It’s
designed to stop the spare tire from falling off your
vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare must
be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” for instructions
on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
,this c. - - -dure read all the
Before be,
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
........
I
4. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-73
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do
the following:
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. if the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
step 4 of “Removing Your Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks
on their shortest ends,
with the backs
facing each other.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is
visible.
2. If it is not visible proceed to step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-74
7. Hook the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack
out from under the spare with the other hand.
If the spare is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
10. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
14. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
5-75
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need to
use both jack handle extensions.
5-76
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions
(as needed). Attach the jack handle to the jack.
If your vehicle has wheel
nut caps, loosen them by
turning the wheel
wrench counterclockwise.
If you have a center
cap with wheel nut caps,
the wheel nut caps
are designed to remain
with the center cap.
Remove the center cap.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift
head to the lifting point.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry out.
5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench
to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Turn the wheel
wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove the
wheel nuts yet.
Front
Position
Rear
Position
Nofice: If your vehicle is equipped with
QUADRASTEERTM avoid contact with tie rods and
tie rod boots when jacking the vehicle.
2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is
on the front of the vehicle, position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap.
On all 1500 series vehicles, use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. On 2500 series vehicles,
use the axle between the spring and shock.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of your
vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before raising
the vehicle.
5-78
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Front Position
5-79
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
Rear Position
1500 Series
Rear Position
2500 Series
3. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head. Turn the wheel
wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to fit back underneath the
rear of the vehicle.
5-80
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
6. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
nuts back on with
the rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand
using the wheel wrench
until the wheel is
held against the hub.
Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheelcould
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches
to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
this; but be sure to use
or a paper towel to do
a scraper or wire brush later, if you needto, to
get all the rust or dirtoff.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could
fall off, causing
serious
a
accident.
I
I
I
5-81
8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improC-:ly ..,htened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened witha torque wrench to the
proper torque specification.See ”Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
5-83
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored. To
store the tire:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed downward.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period of time could damage the
wheel. To avoid
this, always stow the wheel properly withthe valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel repaired
as soon as possible.
5-84
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire part way upward. When the tire is
almost in the stored position, adjust the tire so
that the valve stem is toward the rear of the vehicle.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it ship twice.
The cable cannot be overtightened.
PUSH & PULL
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Put back the jack, tools and spare tire lock (if equipped).
A. Hoist Assembly
B. WheelWrench
C.JackHandle
Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Flat or Spare Tire
G. Tire Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
5-85
To store the tools, follow these procedures:
For TahoeNukon models do the following:
1. Put the tool kit, with the jack tools and gloves, in
the tool bag and place in the retaining clip above
the jack.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left
trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to
secure.
5. Return the storage tray.
2. Tighten down with the wing nut.
3. Then, assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack
together with the wing nut and retaining hook.
4. Position behind the jack storage cover in the rear
access panel, and tighten, adjusting clockwise until
the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket.
Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack
onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
For Suburban/Yukon XL models do the following:
1. Return the tool kit (jack tools and gloves) to the
tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack together
with the wing nut and retaining hook.
3. Position under the jack storage tray in the left rear
side panel below the wheelbase and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in
the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the
holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the
mounting bracket.
5-86
TahoeNukon Models (Rear Access Panel)
A. Tool Kit with
Jack Tools
d. Bracket andWingNut
C. Wheel
Block
Wing
Nut
D. Tire Blocks
E. Jack
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly, See Inflation -- Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and “Loading Your Vehicle” for information
regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle.
For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare
tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
SuburbanNukon XL models
A.
B.
C.
D.
Bottle
Jack
WheelBlocks
Wing Nut
MountingBracket
E. RemovableTray
F. Retaining Hook
G. Retaining Bracket and
Wing Nut
H. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
5-87
Appearance Care
They can all be hazardous - some more than
others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
LaundrySoap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
5-88
FabricKarpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-94.
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before
they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a watedbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 mi)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-89
Vinyl
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
0
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyVleather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Interior Plastic Components
Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass Surfaces
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-90
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-94.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged.Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold
water.
Do not bleach or dye safety ,,Its. If ,u do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. SeePart D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 16.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-94. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
5-9 1
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-94.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chromepolish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoaffclearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
5-92
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-93
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
I
I
I
5-94
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
I
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
I
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and finqerprints.
I
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
GM Vehicle CarelAppearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on Raae 6-16.
5-95
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
your VIN,
the modeldesignation,
paint information and
SAMPLE4UXI M072675
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
5-96
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with yourdealer first.
Some electrical equipment candamage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without - like the radio or
cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-97
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
I
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is
mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses
if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the
fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull
straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
CB
LTDOORS
I
Fuses
RR Wiper
Rear
Window
Wiper
Switch
I Usage
Special Equipment Option
Accessorv
SEO ACCY
TBC ACCY
I
Truck Body Controller
Accessorv
I Ignition,
Seats
Heated
I
IGN 3
5-98
1
I
I
Fuses
4WD
HTR N C
LOCK
HVAC 1
I
I
L DOOR
I CRUISE
UNLOCK
RR FOG LP
BRAKE
DRIVER UNLOCK
0
I TBC
IGN
Four-wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
Climate Control System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control Svstem
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
I Cruise Control
I
Power Door Lock Relay
IUnlock Function)
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
Anti-Lock Brake Svstem
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
PCM, TCM IGN
I Truck
Bodv
Controller
I
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Storslamr,
I LeftTurn Signal/Stop Trailer I
0
VEH CHMSL
I LTTRLRST/TRN
LT TRN
VEH STOP
RT TRLRST/TRN
RT TRN
BODY
DDM
AUX PWR 2
I Usage
I
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
Right TurnSignaVStop Trailer
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Connector
I Harness
I Driver
Module
Door
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
ISystem
Power
Lock
Door
Rear Electronic Climate
Control
I Truck
Bodv
Controller
Flasher Module
Left Power Window Circuit
Breaker
I Truck
Bodv
Controller
I Truck
Body
Controller
I
I
I
I
I
LOCKS
ECC
2C
TBC
FLASH
CB LT DOORS
I
I
TBC 2 6
2A
TBC
5-99
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Device
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
lUsage
EauiPment
I SPecial
OPtion
I
INFO
5-100
I
,
I UDfitter (Not Used)
Ride Control Harness
Connection
Headliner
Connector
Wiring
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
Connector
WiringBodyBODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
'
ITrailer Wiring
Brake
Defoaaer
I Rear
Relav
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
I
Infotainment Harness
Connection
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on its location.
5-101
U
I
*I - Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
Fuses
*2- Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #l.
STUD 2
*3 - Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
ABS
VSES/ECAS
IGN A
IGN B
*4- Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*5 - PCM Ignition
Fuses
GLOW PLUG
CUST FEED
STUD #1
MBEC
BLOWER
LBEC
Usage
Not Used
Gasoline Accessow Power I
Auxiliary Power (Single
Battery and Diesels
Only)/Dual Battery (TP2) Do
not install fuse.
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
Front Climate Control Fan
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Door Modules, Door Locks,
Auxiliary Power Outlet-Rear
Cargo Area and Instrument
Panel
Usage
Accessory PowerRrailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Anti-Lock Brakes
Vehicle Stability
lqnition Power
Ignition Power
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
LBEC 1
LR PARK
PARK LP
I
INTPARK
STOP LP
TBC BATT
I
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Parking Lamps Relay
Starter Relav STARTER
Interior Lamps
Stoplamps
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
5-103
f
Fuses
SUNROOF
SEO 82
4ws
Usage
Off-Road Lamps
Vent Solenoid
Canister/QUADRASTEERTM
Module Power
Rear Climate Control
Auxiliary Power
Outlet - Console
I Ignition Relay
I Powertrain Control Module
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Instrument Panel Cluster, Air
Conditioning Relay, Turn
SignaVHazard Switch, Starter
Relav
HID
Ride Control
LamDs Trailer Wiring
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump
(Relay)
I
HVAC
RR
AUX PWR
I
I
I
IGN 1
PCM 1
ETC/ECM
IGN E
RTD
TRLBackue
B/U
PCM B
P
F/PM
5-104
II
I Fuses
I
I Usaae
1
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control Svstem
Rear Window Defogger
RR DEFOG
Headlamp Hiqh Beam Relay
HDLP-HI
I PRIME
Used
I Not
I
Supplemental Inflatable
SIR
Svstem
Restraint
Front Parking Lamps,
FRT PARK
Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
DRL
. (Relay)
I SEO IGN
Relav
Defog
I Rear
I
Truck
Body
Controller
Ignition
TBC IGN1
High Beam Headlamp-Left
HI HDLP-LT
I LH
Used I Not
I
DRL
Lamps
Running
Daytime
Instrument Panel
CIuster/Driver Information
IPC/DIC
Center
HVAC/ECAS
Climate
Control
Controller
I
B/U LP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Usage
I
Cigarette Lighter
High Beam Headlamp-Right
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
Horn
Air conditioning
Compressor
Relav
Horn
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relav
Rear Wiper/Washer
I
Audio
I
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
HomeLink, Rear Heated
Seats
I Fuses
Fog
Relay
Lamp
Fog Lamps
Fuse
FOG LP
FOG LP
HORN
HORN
I I
Svstem
1 Usage
W/S WASH
WIS WASH
I
INFO
I RADIO AMP
RH HID
Brake Transmission
Shift
Horn
HORN
Interlock Svstem
Pedals
Adjustable
Electric EAP
All-Wheel
TREC
I SBA
I
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
OnStar/Rear Seat
Entertainment
I Radio
Amplifier
Not Used
I
Drive Module
1 SumlementalAssist
Brake
5-105
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16 for more information.
All capacities are approximate.
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
V8 4800
VORTEC
VORTEC 5300 V8
I
I
Type
V8
V8
VORTEC 5300 V8
V8
VORTEC 6000 V8
V8
VORTEC 8100 V8
I
V8
VIN Code
I
I
I
I
Spark Plug Gap
V
mm)
I 0.060
(1.52
inches
I
T
mm)
I 0.060
(1.52
inches
I
U
G
I 0.060 inches (1-52 mm)
I 0.060 inches (15 2 mm)
I 0.060 inches (15 2 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Model
C/K 1500
2500
Tire Pressure
5-106
Description
6 bolts (14 mm)
Torque
140 Ib ft (190 Nom)
8 bolts (14 mm) C/K
140 Ib ft (190 Nom)
See the CertificationRire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door or the
incomplete vehicle document in the cab.
I
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See Cooling System on page 5-33.
Cooling System Capacity
*Vehicles equipped with the optional air conditioner.
**Vehicles equipped with the optional engine oil cooler.
Add one liter if equipped with rear heating for all engines.
5-107
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.
See Engine Oil on page 5- 17.
Capacities
Capacities
Application
English
Engine Oil with Filter
I
Metric
VORTEC 4800 V8 VIN V
6.0 quartst
5.7 L t
VORTEC 5300 V8 VIN T
6.0 quartst
5.7 L t
VORTEC 5300 V8 VIN Z (E-85)
6.0 quartst
5.7 L t
VORTEC 6000 V8 VIN U
6.0 quartst
5.7 L t
VORTEC 8100 V8 VIN G
6.5 quartst
6.1 L t
TahoeNukon
26.0 gallons
98.4 L
SuburbanNukon XL (1500 Series)
31 .O gallons
117.3 L
SuburbanNukon XL (2500 Series)
37.5 gallons
140.0 L
TahoeNukon
2.71Ibs.
1.23 kg
SuburbanNukon XL
3.0 Ibs.
1.36 kg
Fuel Tank Capacity
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
t o i l filter should be changed at every oil change.
5-108
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it
was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer's publications.
Normi31 Maintenance Replacement Parts
I
I
I
VIN Code
Oil Filter*
Engine Air
Cleaner /Filter*
I
1
I
Passenger
Compartment Air
Filter Kit**
I
II
PCV Valve*
Spark
Fuel Filter"
I
I
T
V
I
PF44
PF44
~
z
PF44
~
G
U
PF44
PF454
~~
A1519Ct
A I 519 C t
A I 519 C t
A I 51 8C
A I 518C
524855 13
52485513
52485513
52485513
524855 13
CV~OOI-c
4 1-974*
/PZTR5A15tt
GF626
cv200 1-c
cv2001-c
cv2001-c
-
~~
41-974*
-974*
41
-974*
41
/PZTR5A15tt
/PZTRSAI 5 t t
G F626
GF626
I
I
~
/PZTR5A15tt
F626G
I
41-983*
I
GF626
5-109
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts (cont'd)
VIN Code
v
T
z
Wiper Blades
(Front)**
15153642
15153642
15153642
Wiper Blade Type
(Front)
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
Wiper Blade
Length (Front)
Wiper Blades
(Rear)**
Wiper Blade Type
(Rear)
22 inches
22 inches
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
(56.0 cm) (56.0 cm)
22 1 54396 221 54396
ITTA
ITTA
151 53642
ITTA
G
15153642
ITTA
ITTA
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22154396 221 54396
18 inches
18 inches
18 inches
Wipe Blade
(45.0 cm) (45.0 cm)
Length (Rear)
"ACDelco part number
**GM part number
***Denso part number
tA1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
ttSpark Plug Gap is 0.060 inches
tt"NGK Dart number
5-110
U
ITTA
221 54396
ITTA
18 inches
18 inches
(45.0 cm)
(45.0 cm) (45.0 cm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................
6.2
introduction ................................................... 6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6.2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6.4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ................... -6-4
Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6.5
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-10
At Each Fuel Fill .......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................. 6.10
At Least Twice a Year ............................... 6.10
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6.11
Part 6 : Periodic Maintenance inspections .........6.14
Steering and Suspension Inspection ................6.14
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.14
Fuel System inspection ..................................6.14
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6.14
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-wheel Drive) inspection ..................... 6.15
Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.15
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6.16
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.18
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINEOIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGEAS
RECOMMENDED
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s servicedepartment or another
qualified service center do thesejobs.
Performing maintenance w-.-_ -n a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician dothe work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-1 1.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication
scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life
system and how it indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with
each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance
services which are to be performed at the mileage
intervals specified.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationnire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-56.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle on page 4-22.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks andServices on page 6- 10
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-14.
Footnotes
t
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify
the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenanceservices be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-15.
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
GM Oil Life SystemTM(or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. It is also important to
check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level
6-5
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-17 for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil
and filter change.
Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift
linkage and parking brake cable guides. Ball joints
should not be lubricated unless their temperature is
10°F (-1 2°C) or higher, or they could be damaged.
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
6-6
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote t-)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 Ibs or if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotationpattern and additional
information. (See footnote +-)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotationpattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
0 Change transfer case fluid.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote f.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
u Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel
and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing and condition. Check that the purge valve
works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
u Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
u
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +,)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
6-8
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern andadditional
information. (See footnote +.)
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote f.)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
u
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
CI Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotationpattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Cl Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 Ibs or if the vehicle
is mainly driven under oneor more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
0 Change transfer case fluid.
0 Except 8.1 L V8 Engine: Inspect Positive Crankcase
Ventilation (PCV) valve. An Emission Control
Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
CI Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
6-9
Part B: Qwner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important foryou or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-77 for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27 for further details.
6-10
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page5-39 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-67 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page3-70 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear wornor damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle onpage 5-91.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrenchhatchet to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-70.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6- 16.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-25. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door
detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points,
latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks
and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
6-1 1
Starter Switch Check
Whenyou are d_..rgthis chec.., the v
,
I
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-35 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-12
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-35if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P),your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-13
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-40.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering information on page 7-1 1.
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-14
Fuel System Inspection
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem;
check and have it repaired, if needed. On manual
shift transfer case,oil the control lever pivot point. Check
vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-15
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
Engine Oil
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5- 17.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water
and use only DEX-COOL
Engine Coolant
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-27.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent or
WasherSolvent equivalent.
GM Power Steering Flui
Power
1052884, in
d
(GM993294,
Part No. U.S.
System
Canada
or equivalent).
6-16
Usage
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis
Lubrication
Front Axle
(Four-wheel
Drive)
~
~~
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Rear Axle
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON-Ill Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Mulit-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U S . 12377985, in Canada
88901242, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 8OW-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S.1052271, in
Canada 10950849 or equivalent).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12378261, in Canada
10953455) or equivalent meeting
GM Specification 99861 15.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No.
U S . 12378261, in Canada
10953455) or equivalent meeting
GM Specification 99861 15.
Usage
Rear Axle
(Steerable)
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive with
Stabilitrak@)
FluicVLubricant
Synthetic Axle Lubricant; use only
GM Part No. 12378557 (in Canada
88901362). Do not add friction
modifier.
Dexron-Ill Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part
Automatic
Transfer Case No. U.S. 12378508, in Canada
10953626).
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
One-Piece
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Propshaft
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
Spline
(Two-Wheel GM 9985830.
Drive with Auto.
Trans.)
Usage
Hood Hinges
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Weatherstrip
‘Onditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
FluidLubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U S . 12345579, in Canada
1974984, or equivalent).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437, or
equivalent).
6-17
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-18
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
~
Customer Assistance Information ...................... 7.2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...................... 7-2
Online Owner Center ...................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ............................................... 7.4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................ 7.4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ......................................
....7.5
~~~~
~~~
~
~
~
~
Roadside Assistance Program .......................... 7.6
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7.8
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government .............................................. 7.10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government .............................................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7- 1
~
~
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcernsWeencourageyou
to call the toll-free number in order to
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
give your inquiry promptattention.Pleasehavethe
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
following information available to give the Customer
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
Assistance Representative:
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member or
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
Dealership nameand location
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
the general manager.
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However,if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the CanadianMotor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance Off ices
The Owner Center at MyGMLink is a resource for your
GM ownership needs. You can find your specific
vehicle information all in one place.
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
The Owner Center allows you to:
Get e-mail service reminders.
United States
Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to MyGMLink members.
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle visit www.MyGMLink.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
7-4
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 31 3-381
-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 31 3-381
-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854(French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices(TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910 Mexico, D.F.
0 1-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Coutfesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
Toll-free number, 1 -800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
7-6
Roadside Courtesy Care provides:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined
previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation
will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided
by the Bumper-to-Bumper New VehicleLimited
Warranty to eligible purchasers of 2003 Chevrolet
passenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your selling
dealer for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2003 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify
or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at
any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor;
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
License plate number
Vehiclecolor
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
7-7
Courtesy Transportation
Plan Ahead When Possible
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud tooffer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-8
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending onthe circumstances,
your dealer can offer you oneof the following:
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-9
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5
Reporting Safety Defectsto General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-51 70
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Supplement to the 2003 Silverado, Sierra, Tahoe, Suburban,
r’s Manual
Passenger Sensing System
Accident statistics showthat children aresafer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors, therefore, recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a child in rear-facing child restraint in the tight
front passenger seatunless your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system and the passenger
air bag
status indicator shows off. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the air
bag is off.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15189747
I
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killedif the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close tothe inflating air bag. Be
sure the air bag is off before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position.
CAUTION:
‘Copyright General Motors
(Continued)
Corporation 06/24/02
All Rights Reserved
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bagif:
the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
~
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turnoff the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance,even
though it is turned off. General Motors,
therefore, recommends that rear-facingchild
restraints be secured in the rear seat whenever
possible, even if the air bag is off.
the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
a right front passenger takes hislher weight off of
the seat for a period of time
the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
or if there is a critical problem with the air bag
system or the passenger sensing system.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly - whether or not there is an air bag
for that person.
2
AccessoryPowerOutlets .................................
3-18
AddingWasher Fluid .......................................
5-40
AdditionalProgramInformation .........................
7-10
Additives,Fuel ................................................. 5-6
5-97
Add-on ElectricalEquipment ............................
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) .................. 3-73, 3-78, 3-89, 3-103
Air Bag
Passenger
Status
Indicator
.........,
.......... 3-38
ReadinessLight ......................................
3-38
Air Bag Systems .....................................
1-68, 1-73
Adding Equipment to Your
1-79
AirBag-EquippedVehicle ..........................
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
....................
1-74
Passenger Sensing System ...........................
1-76
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-79
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ....................
1-74
What Will You See After an Air
BagInflates? ...........................................
1-74
When Should an Air Bag
Inflate? ................... 1-72
Where Are the Air Bags? ..............................
1-70
Air Cleaner/Filter,Engine .................................
5-22
All Overseas Locations ......................................
7-5
All-Wheel Drive ...............................................
5-50
All-Wheel Drive withStabilitrak@ .......................
2-32
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .................. 5-93
AM .............................................................
3-125
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-71
3-128
Antenna, Fixed Mast ......................................
Antenna, XMTMSatellite Radio System ............. 3-128
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
.............. 3-42
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light
Appearance Care ............................................
5-88
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
5-91
5-94
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the Inside ofYour Vehicle ................ 5-88
Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............. 5-91
Finish Damage ............................................
5-93
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 5-94
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
5-93
UnderbodyMaintenance ...............................
5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19
Audio Output ................................................
3-120
AudioSystem(s) .............................................
3-70
Audio Systems
AM-FM Radio .............................................
3-71
3-124
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ....................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-126
Care of YourCD and DVD Player ................ 3-127
3-127
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .......................
3-128
Chime Level Adjustment .............................
3-128
DAB Radio Antenna System ........................
3-128
Fixed Mast Antenna ...................................
3-85
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
3-74
Radio with CD ............................................
3-99
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Audio Systems (cont.)
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...............................
3-122
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................
3-71
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
DataSystems(RDS) ................................
3-70
Theft-Deterrent Feature ...............................
3-124
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-125
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-128
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
3-14
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-58
2-29
Automatic Transfer Case ..................................
Automatic Transmission
5-25
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
2-25
Automatic Transmission Check ..........................
6-11
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
6-12
4-58
AutorideTM .....................................................
Auxiliary RoofMountedLamp Switch ................. 3-16
B
Backing Up ................................................
Battery ..........................................................
BATTERYNOTCHARGING .............................
Battery Replacement .........................................
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................
Battery Warning Light ......................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
.........................
2
4-68
5-44
3-63
2-6
3-18
3-40
4-43
3-113
Before You Drive ...........................................
Bench Seat ....................................................
1-14
1-10
Bench Seat Split (50/50) ..................................
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ...................................
1-8
Body Lubrication Service ...............................
6-11
Brake
Parking ...........................................
... 2-35
6-15
System Inspection .......................................
SystemWarning Light ..................................
3-41
Brake Adjustment ............................................
5-43
Brake Fluid ....................................................
5-40
2-23
Brake Pedal, Throttle .......................................
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-43
5-43
BrakeWear ...................................................
Brakes ................................................... 2-23, 5-40
Braking ...........................................................
4-6
Braking in Emergencies .....................................
4-9
Break-In, NewVehicle .....................................
2-21
Bucket Seats, Rear .........................................
1-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-54
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-55
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-54
Headlamps .................................................
5-54
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-59
Roof Marker Lamps .....................................
5-56
Side Identification MarkerLamps ................... 5-56
5-58
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying NewTires ...........................................
5-64
C
California Fuel ..................................................
5-6
7-5
Canada ...........................................................
Canadian Owners ................................................
ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................... .... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications ........................ ... 5-106
CarWashesforQUADRASTEERTMEquipped
Vehicles ................................................. .... 4-18
CarbonMonoxide ................ 4.46,4.59,
2- 13. 2-40
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................
5-91
Care ofYour
3-126
Cassette Tape Player .................................
CD and DVD Player ...................................
3-127
3-127
CDsandDVDs .........................................
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................
2-59
3-95
Cassette Tape Messages .................................
Cassette Tape Player Service ...........................
6-10
CDAdapter Kits .............................................
3-96
Center Console Storage Area ...........................
2-57
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................ 5-100
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-36
5-68
Chains, Tires ..................................................
3-62
CHANGE ENGINE OIL ....................................
Check
EngineLight ...............................................
3-46
Check Engine Light ...................................... 3-46
CHECK OIL LEVEL ......................................
3-67
CHECK WASHER FLUID ................................. 3-67
CheckingBrake Fluid ......................................
5-41
Checking Coolant ............................................
5-29
5-18
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
5-12
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
1-80
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
5-94
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems .............. .....,
.... 1-49
1-46
Infants and Young Children ...................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCHSystem) ..........................
1-56
Older Children .............................................
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCHSystem ........................................
1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
1-61
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ...........................................
1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position ...........................................
1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
1-64
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
1-53
.... 1-54
Top Strap Anchor Location .................
Where to Put the Restraint ........
........ 1-52
3
Chime Level Adjustment .................................
3-128
3-19
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
5-88
Inside ofYour Vehicle ..............................
Outside ofYour Vehicle ............................
5-91
UnderbodyMaintenance ...............................
5-93
......................
.............. 3-127
Video
Screen
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91
Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses .......................
5-91
2-45
Cleaning the Mirror .........................................
Climate Control
Dual Automatic ................................
..... 3-24
Climate Control System ...................................
3-20
3-21
Dual ..........................................................
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic ................................................ 3-33
3-30
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................
Compact Disc Messages ................ 3-84, 3-98, 3-112
Compass Calibration ...............................
2-44, 2-46
Compass Operation .........................................
2-46
Compass Variance ..................................
2-43, 2-47
Content Theft-Deferrent ....................................
2-18
Control of a Vehicle ..........................................
4-6
ConvenienceNet ............................................ 2-59
Coolant
EngineTemperatureGage ............................
3-44
Heater, Engine ............................................
2-24
5-30
Surge Tank Pressure Cap .............................
4
Cooling System ..........................................
5-33
Cruise Control .......................
................. 3-10
3-49
Cruise Control Light ........................................
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-57
Current and Past Model Order Forms
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
CourtesyTransportation ...............................
7-8
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY)Users ..............................................
7-4
7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ...........................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .....................
7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
7-5
Disabilities ................................................
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................
7-10
Roadside Assistance Program .........................
7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
3-126
DAB Radio ...............................................
3-15
DaytimeRunningLamps ..................................
4-2
Defensive Driving .............................................
3-22, 3-28
Defogging and Defrosting .........................
Delayed Locking .............................................
2-10
Dinghy Towing ................................................
4-53
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-55
DomeLamps ................................................. 3-18
Door
Delayed Locking ..........................................
2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks .........................................
2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..........................
2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................. 1-28
DRIVERDOORAJAR ..................................... 3-68
3-52
Driver Information Center (DIC) .........................
DIC Operation and Displays ..........................
3-52
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................
3-62
Driving
4-36
AtNight .....................................................
City .......
............................................ 4-41
Defensive .....................................................
4-2
Drunken .......................................................
4-3
4-42
Freeway .....................................................
Hill and Mountain Roads ..............................
4-44
In Rain and on Wet Roads
...........................
4-38
Winter ........................................................ 4-46
Driving On Grades ..........................................
4-69
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
4-46
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-40
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
4-40
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
4-67
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-24
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-21
DVD
Care ofYour ............................................. 3-127
Care ofYour DVD Player ............................ 3-127
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-127
Distortion ..................................................
3-125
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-113
DVD Player ..................................................
3-1 13
E
Easy Exit Seat .................................
... 2-62
Electrical System
5-97
Add-on Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
5-97
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-97
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
5-97
Electrochromic Mirror Operation ................ 2.43, 2-46
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs .................................
3-48
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
5-22
Battery ....................................................... 5-44
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-46
Coolant ......................................................
5-27
Coolant Heater ............................................
2-24
Coolant TemperatureGage ...........................
3-44
5
Engine (cont.)
Cooling System Inspection ............................
6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
5-14
Exhaust .....................................................
2-40
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-38
Oil .............................................................
5-17
Overheating ................................................
5-30
Starting ......................................................
2-22
ENGINE COOLANT HOT .................................
3-62
6-10
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................
Engine Hour Meter Display ...............................
3-37
5-21
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Scheduled
Maintenance ................................................. 6-5
Engine Oil Level Check ...................................
6-10
3-63
ENGINEOVERHEATED ..................................
Entering or Exiting the Third
Row
Seats
........................
................ 1-8
Entertainment System
Cleaning the Video Screen ..........................
3-127
DVD Distortion ..........................................
3-125
Entry Lighting .................................................
3-17
Erasing HomeLink@Buttons ..............................
2-56
Exit Lighting ...................................................
3-17
2-16
Express-Down Windows ...................................
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-43
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
6
F
FabricKarpet .................................................
5-89
Filter
Engine
Air
Cleaner
....
...........................
5-22
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS.XMTMandDAB) ............... 3.78.3.89.
3-103
Finding a Station .................. 3-72, 3-76, 3-87, 3-101
Finish Care ....................................................
5-92
Finish Damage ...............................................
5-93
Fixed Mast Antenna .......................................
3-128
3-8
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................
Flat Tire ....................................................
5-69
FlatTire,Changing ..........
.......................
5-70
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................
5-25
Power Steering .......................................
5-38
Windshield Washer ..................................
5-39
FM Stereo ....................................................
3-125
FogLamps ....................................................
3-15
Folding the Seatback .......................................
1-14
Folding the Seatbacks .......................
1-9, 1-11, 1-19
Following Distance ..........................................
4-68
Footnotes ........................................................
6-5
Four-wheel Drive ....................................
2-28, 5-52
Four-Wheel-Drive Light ....................................
3-50
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-53
Front Axle Locking Feature ...............................
2-28
Front Reading Lamps ......................................
3-17
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-57
Frontal Air Bags .............................................
1-72
5-5
Fuel ...............................................................
Additives ......................................................
5-6
5-6
CaliforniaFuel ..............................................
E-85 (85% Ethanol) .......................................
5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................
5-11
Filling YourTank ...........................................
5-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries ..............................
5-8
Gage .........................................................
3-51
GasolineOctane ...........................................
5-5
GasolineSpecifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light .......................................
3-51
System Inspection .......................................
6-1 4
Fuel Information Button ....................................
3-55
3-66
FUEL LEVEL LOW .........................................
Fuses
FusesandCircuitBreakers
..., ....................
5-97
..............
....................
5-97
Windshield
Wiper
Lamps
G
Bulbs
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ......................................
............
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Transmission Temperature .............................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
3-44
3-51
3-49
3-37
3-37
3-44
3-40
...........
..... 2-53
GarageOpener
Door
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ...............................................
5-6
GateOperator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-55
Glass Surfaces ...............................................
5-90
2-57
GloveBox .....................................................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .............................................
... 7-5
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers ...................................
Head Restraints ...............................................
1-7
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ....................
5-54
Headlamps ....................................................
5-54
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
5-55
Running
........................................
............................................
Halogen
5-54
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-56
SideIdentificationMarkerLamps
................... 5-56
Headphones .................................................
3-118
Heated Seats ...................................................
1-5
Highway Hypnosis ...........................................
4-44
Hill and MountainRoads ..................................
4-44
Hitches ..........................................................
4-65
HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-54
HomeLink@Transmitter ....................................
2-53
7
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................
5-12
Release ..................................................... 5-12
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
5-35
Surge Tank .................................................
How to Add Fluid ............................................
5-27
How to Check ........................................
5-25, 5-62
How to Check Lubricant ...................................
5-51
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-39
How to Use This Manual ......................................
ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-27
Hydroplaning ..................................................
4-40
If No Steam Is Coming From
5-32
Your Engine ................................................
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-31
3-47
If the Light is Flashing .....................................
3-47
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-50
4-60
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
It You’reCaught
...........................
4-48
in
a
Blizzard
.
Ignition Positions .................................
.... 2-21
6-13
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-46
5-62
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
8
Inspection
BrakeSystem .........................................
Engine Cooling System ....................
....
ExhaustSystem ......................................
Fuel System ...........................................
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
Steering and Suspension ..............................
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-wheel Drive) ...................................
Instrument Panel
Cluster .......................................................
Overview .....................................................
Instrument Panel Brightness .............................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................
Interior Lamps ................................................
Interior Plastic Components ..............................
Jump Starting .....................
6-15
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
3-36
3-4
3-17
5-98
3-17
5-90
..... 5-45
6-11
Key Lock Cylinders Service ..............................
Keyless Entry System .......................................
2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
3-46
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................ 3-38
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
3-13
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
3-37
Interior ....................................................... 3-17
Tow/Haul
Mode
...........................................
3-50
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
3-14
Traction Off ................................................
3-43
Lap Belt ........................................................
1-37
Lighted VisorVanity Mirror ...............................
2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
1-28
Listening to aDVD ................................
3-98, 3-113
LATCHSystem
Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
4-56
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-56
Locking
Axle
Rear
................................
... 4-11
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
Lockout Protection ...............................
... 2-12
LATCHSystem ........................................
1-59
Lock-Out Switch ..................................
... 2-17
Leather ......................................................... 5-90
Locks
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Delayed Locking ..........................................
2-10
EngineRunning ..........................................
2-37
Door ...........................................................
2-8
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
AJAR
................................ 3-68
Lockout Protection .......................................
2-12
Level Control .................................................. 4-57
Power
Door
..................................................
2-9
Liftgate ..........................................................
2-1Programmable
3
Automatic
Door
Locks
............. 2-10
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate ................................
2-13
Rear
Door
Security Locks .............................
2-12
Light
of Control ...............................................
4-21
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
3-38
LOW
COOLANT
LEVEL
..................................
3-62
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-42
Low Fuel Warning Light ...................................
3-51
BatteryWarning ..........................................
3-40
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-57
Brake System Warning .................................
3-41
Lumbar
Cruise Control .............................................
3-49
Power Controls .........
..... 1-4
Four-Wheel-Drive.........................................
3-50
LowFuelWarning ....................................
3-51
9
M
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-109
Maintenance Schedule
At
Each
Fuel Fill .............
.....................
6-10
At Least Once a Month .............................
6-10
At Least Once a Year ..................................
6-1 1
At Least Twice a Year ..................................
6-10
Brake System Inspection ..............................
6-15
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-14
ExhaustSystem Inspection ...........................
6-14
Fuel System Inspection .............................
6-14
How This Section is Organized ....
....... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................
6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-10
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-14
Part D - Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants .........................................
6-16
Part E - MaintenanceRecord ........................
6-18
ScheduledMaintenance .................................
6-5
Steering and
Suspension Inspection ..
...... 6-14
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-wheel Drive) Inspection ....................
6-15
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
4-71
10
Making Turns ................................... ........... 4-68
3-46
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................
Manual Seats ...................................................
1-3
ManualWindows ............................................ 2-16
Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle ............... 2-6
MemorySeat .................................................
2-61
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages
........................
3-62
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U S. Virgin
Islands) .......................................................
7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ...........................
2-45
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Onstar@,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-42
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................
2-42
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-49
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................
2-48
Outside ConvexMirror .............................
2-50
... 2-50
Outside Curb View Assist
Mirrors ........
2-50
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................
2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type .........................
2-49
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ....................
2-49
2-48
Outside Power Mirrors ..................................
ModelReference ................................................ vi
MyGMLink.com ................................................
7-4
~
~
~
NewVehicle Break-In ......................................
2-21
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-109
0
Odometer ..................................................
3-37
Off-Road Recovery ............. .......................... 4-19
Oil
Engine .......................................................
5-17
Pressure Gage ............................................
3-49
OIL PRESSURE LOW .....................................
3-63
OlderChildren.Restraints ................................
1-44
Online Owner Center ........................................
7-4
Onstar@ Personal Calling .................................
2-52
Onstar@Services ............................................
2-51
Onstar@Steering Wheel Controls ......................
2-52
Onstar@System .........................................
2-51
Onstar@ Virtual Advisor ................................
2-52
Operating Your AII-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads ..............................................
4-22
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
OutletAdjustment ...................................
3-23, 3-29
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror .............................
2-49
Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-48
Convex Mirror .............................................
2-50
..............................
2-50
Curb View Assist Mirrors
Outside (cont.)
Heated Mirrors ............................................
2-50
Manual Mirrors ............................................
2-48
2-49
Power Foldaway Mirrors ...............................
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror ................... 2-49
OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode
(V8 EnginesOnly) .......................................
5-30
Owners,Canadian ...............................................
ii
Owner’s information ..................................... 7-12
P
Panel Doors ...................................................
2-14
Park (P)
Shifting Out of
................
....... 2-38
Parking
... 2-35
Brake ......................................
Over Things That Burn ......................
... 2-39
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
Park (P) Mechanism Check ...........................
6-13
Parking on Hills ..............................................
4-69
Park(P)
Shifting Into ................................................
2-36
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part 6 - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-10
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-14
PartD - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-16
Part E - MaintenanceRecord ...........................
6-18
~~~~~~
11
Passenger Air Bag Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44. 2-47
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................... 3-38
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR ..............................
3-68
1-76
Passenger Sensing System ..............................
Passing .................................................
4.19. 4-68
Passlock@......................................................
2-20
Pedals ..........................................................
2-23
Personalization Button .....................................
3-56
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................
7-8
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-94
Playing a Compact Disc ................. 3.83.3.96.
3-108
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc ............................................
3-109
Playing the Radio ................. 3.71.3.75.3.86.
3-100
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................
3-18
DoorLocks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System .........................................
5-97
Lumbar Controls ...........................................
1-4
Seat ............................................................
1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38
Windows ....................................................
2-16
Power Steering ............................................... 4-14
Power Winches ..............................................
4-73
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-54
QUADRASTEERTM ......................................... 4-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-26
R
3.73.3.80.
3-91
Radio Messages .........................
3-70
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM ......................................................
3-71
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-126
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-127
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .......................
3-127
DAB Radio Antenna System ........................
3-128
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
3-85
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-74
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
3-99
Rear Seat Audio ........................................
3-122
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
DataSystems(RDS) ................................
3-71
Setting the Time for Radios without
....................
3-70
RadioDataSystems(RDS)
Theft-Deterrent ..........................................
3-124
Understanding Reception ............................
3-125
RDS and DAB Messages ............... 3-79, 3-90. 3-104
REAR ACCESS OPEN ....................................
3-65
RearAir Conditioning and Heating System
.. 3-31
~
12
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
ElectronicClimateControls ........................... 3-33
Rear Air Conditioning System ...........................
3-30
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Locking ......................................................
4-1 1
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
......................
1-41
Rear Seat Audio ...........................................
3-122
Rear Seat Audio Controls ...............................
3-123
Rear Seat Entertainment System .....................
3-1 13
Rear Seat Operation .........................................
1-8
RearSeat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-38
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-38
Rear Storage Area ..........................................
2-59
Rear Window Defogger ............................
3-23, 3-28
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-45
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Onstar@, Compass and Temperature Display ... 2-42
Rearview Mirrors .............................................
2-42
Reclining Seatbacks ..........................................
1-5
Reclining the Seatbacks ...................................
1-19
Recreational Vehicle Towing .............................
4-53
REDUCED BRAKE POWER .............................
3-65
REDUCEDENGINEPOWER ...........................
3-63
Remote Alarm ..................................................
2-6
Remote Control .............................................
3-116
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................
2-4
Remote Keyless EntrySystem, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ................ 1-12
1-17
Removing the Bench Seat ................................
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Replacement Bulbs .........................................
5-59
Replacing Brake System Parts ..........................
5-44
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ..............................................
1-81
Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ................ 1-13
Replacing the Bench Seat ................................
1-18
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ..................................
7-11
7-11
General Motors ...........................................
United States Government ............................
7-10
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkO Button ....... 2-56
Resetting Defaults ...........................................
2-56
Restraint System Check ...................................
6-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-80
Replacing Restraint SystemParts
After
Crash
a
......................
............ 1-81
Restraint Systems
1-80
Checking ....................................................
1-81
Replacing Parts ...........................................
Restraints, Head ...............................................
1-7
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......................
2-22
3-68
RFA # BATTERY LOW ....................................
RightFrontPassenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-36
3-68
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR ..............................
13
Roadside
Assistance Program ......................
......... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-51
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-40
S
Safety Belt
...........................
3-37
Reminder Light ......
Safety Belts
5-91
Care of ......................................................
Center Passenger Position ............................
1-36
Driver Position ............................................ 1-28
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-27
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-26
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
1-41
1-38
RearSeatPassengers .................................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
1-36
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
1-43
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy ................. 1-35
Safety Belts AreforEveryone
.......................
1-22
4-66
Safety Chains .............................................
...
Safety Warnings
and
Symbols
..........
............ 111
Scheduled
Maintenance
................
.......... 6-5
Seats
1-10
50/50 Split Bench Seat .................................
60/40 SplitBenchSeat ..................................
1-8
BenchSeat ................................................
1-14
14
Seats (cont.)
Bucket Seats. Rear ......................................
1-19
1-7
Head Restraints ............................................
1-5
HeatedSeats ...............................................
Manual ........................................................
1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-61
Power Lumbar ..............................................
1-4
Power Seats .................................................
1-4
Rear Seat Operation ......................................
1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ............................
,..1 - 5
SecondRow ..................................................
1-62
SecondaryLatchSystem
.........................
..... 5-73
Securing a Child Restraing
Center Front Seat Position ........................
1-63
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................
1-61
Designed for the LATCHSystem ................... 1-59
1-59
Rear Outside Seat Position .......................
Right Front Seat Position ..........................
1-64
Select Button .................................................
3-62
Self-Adjusting .................................................
4-57
Service ...........................................................
5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
ofYour
Vehicle .....................................................
5-4
Doing YourOwnWork ...................................
5-4
Engine Soon Light .......................................
3-46
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER .............................
3-64
SERVICE 4WD ...............................................
3-65
SERVICE AIRBAG .......................................... 3-63
SERVICEBRAKEBOOSTER ........................... 3-64
SERVICEBRAKESYSTEM .............................
3-63
Service Bulletins .............................................
7-12
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-1 1
SERVICERIDECONTROL ..............................
3-65
SERVICESTABILITY ......................................
3-69
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ..... 3-79, 3-90, 3-104
SettingPresetStations .......... 3-72,3-77, 3-88, 3-102
Setting the Time
RadioswithRadioDataSystems(RDS)
......... 3-71
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS)
..... 3-70
Setting the lone
(BassDreble) .................... 3-73, 3-77, 3-88, 3-102
Sheet Metal Damage .......................................
5-93
2-36
Shifting Into Park (P) .......................................
Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................
2-38
Side Impact Air Bags ....................................... 1-73
Skidding .....................................................
4-21
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips .................... 4-40
SpareTire .....................................................
5-87
Spare Tire Check ............................................
6-11
SpecialFabricCleaningProblems .....................
5-89
Specifications, Capacities ...............................
5-106
3-37
Speedometer ..............................................
(50/50) .........
................. 1-10
Split
Bench
Seat
Split Bench Seat (60/40) ....................................
1-8
Stabilitrak@
System
.......................
... 4-11
Stabilitrak@
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 2-32
3-69
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE ..................................
STABILITY SYS DISABLED ..............................
3-69
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-12
Starting Your Engine .......................................
2-22
Steering ........................................................ 4-14
Steering and SuspensionInspection .................. 6-14
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-15
4-14
Steering Tips ..................................................
Steering Wheel Controls. Audio .......................
3-124
Step-Bumper Pad ...........................................
4-73
Stereo RCA Jacks .........................................
3-1 19
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................
2-57
Convenience Net .....................................
2-59
Cupholder(s) ..............
......................
2-57
Front Storage Area ...................................
2-57
Glove Box .................................................. 2-57
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-57
Rear Storage Area .......................................
2-59
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools ............................
5-84
4-50
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
2-17
Sunroof ...................................................... 2-60
15
Tachometer .................................................
3-37
Taillamps .......................................................
5-58
Temperature and Compass Display ....................
2-42
Temperature Display ........................................
2-45
2-19
Testing the Alarm ............................................
3-124
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
2-1 8
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................
2-18
Passlock@...................................................
2-20
Third Row ......................................................
1-62
Throttle .........................................................
2-23
2-23
Throttle. Adjustable ..........................................
Tilt Wheel ........................................................
3-6
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat .....................
1-11
Tilting the Bench Seat .....................................
1-15
Tire Inflation Check .........................................
6-10
Tires ..................................................... 5-61, 5-93
Buying New Tires ........................................
5-64
Chains .......................................................
5-68
Changing a Flat Tire ....................................
5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
5-69
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-62
Inspection and Rotation ................................
5-62
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-87
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-66
5-67
Wheel Replacement .....................................
16
Tires (cont.)
When It Is Time for New Tires ......................
5-64
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ....................
2-24
Top of the Instrument Panel .............................
5-90
Top Strap ......................................................
1-53
Top Strap Anchor Location ...............................
1-54
Torque Lock ...................................................
2-38
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-65
Tow/Haul Mode ...............................................
2-27
Tow/Haul Mode Light .......................................
3-50
Towing
4-53
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing
Trailer
a
....
.............................. 4-59
YourVehicle ...............................................
4-53
Traction
4-9
Assist System (TAS) ......................................
Off Light .....................................................
3-43
Stabilitrak@ System ...................................... 4-11
TRACTION ACTIVE ........................................
3-67
4-13
Traction Control Operation ................................
Trailer
Recommendations .......................................
4-59
Trailer Brakes .................................................
4-66
Trailer Wiring Harness .....................................
4-71
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-50
Transfer Case and Front Axle (Four-wheel
Drive)Inspection .........................................
6-15
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ...................................
5-25
Temperature Gage .......................................
3-44
TRANSMISSIONHOT .....................................
3-67
Transmission Operation. Automatic ....................
2-25
Transmission. Transaxle. Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ........................................
7-1 1
TransportationOptions ......................................
7-9
TripInformationButton ....................................
3-53
3-37
Trip Odometer ................................................
.......................... 3-7
TurnandLane-ChangeSignals
3-65
TURNSIGNALON .........................................
TurnSignaVMultifunctionLever ...........................
3-7
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
.................. 4-68
Underbody Flushing Service .............................
6-1 3
Underhood Fuse Block ...................................
5-101
Understanding Radio Reception .......................
3-125
............................ 5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
United States ...................................................
7-4
UsedReplacementWheels .............................. 5-68
Using Cleaner on Fabric ..................................
5-89
UsingHomeLink@ ...........................................
2-56
Using Song List Mode ................................... 3-1 11
Using the Recovery Hooks ...............................
4-51
Vehicle
Control ....................................................
Damage Warnings ...........................................
4-6
iv
Vehicle (cont.)
Loading ..................................................
4-56
Symbols ......................................................... iv
VehicleIdentification
5-96
Number (VIN) .............................................
ServicePartsIdentificationLabel
................... 5-96
Vehicle Personalization
Memory
Seat
...........
........................... 2-61
....
...................................
5-44
Vehicle
Storage
Video
Screen ...
.....................................
3-1 16
Vinyl ...............
...................................
5-90
Visors ...........................................................
2-17
VoltmeterGage .............................................. 3-40
3-35
WarningLights.Gages
and Indicators ............
Warnings
DICWarnings and Messages .....................
3-62
Hazard WarningFlashers ...........................
3-5
OtherWarningDevices ..............................
3-6
...
Safety and Symbols .........................
........ 111
VehicleDamage ..............................................
iv
Washing Your Vehicle ......................................
5-91
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-11
Weight of the Trailer ........................................
4-62
4-64
Weight of the Trailer Tongue .............................
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................
5-20
What to Add ..................................................
5-42
What to Do with Used Oil ................................
5-22
17
What to Use ..................................
5-28, 5-39,
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ...............................................
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life SystemTM) ................................
When to Check ..............................................
When to CheckandChange ............................
When to Check Lubricant .................................
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on
a Hill .........................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
Windows .......................................................
Manual ......................................................
Power ........................................................
Windshield, Backglass andWiper Blades ...........
18
5-51
5-66
5-67
5-19
5-21
5-62
5-25
5-51
5-39
4-70
1-52
1-23
2-15
2-16
2-16
5-92
Windshield Washer ...........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ......................................
Fuses ........................................................
Windshield Wipers ............................................
Winter Driving ................................................
Wiper Blade Check .........................................
3-9
5-39
6-10
5-60
5-97
3-8
4-46
6-11
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-128
........ 3-126
XMTMSatellite Radio
Service ...........
Your Vehicle and the Environment .......................
6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising